Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4776 - Contract - Knox, Gailey, Meador - Animal Shelter Renovation - 03_09_1995Resolution No. 4776 March 9, 1995 Item #25 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and between the City of Lubbock and Knox, Gailey & Meador of Lubbock to furnish and install all materials as bid for the Animal Shelter Renovation, for the City of Lubbock, which contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: Be M. Johnson, City ecretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: 9th day of March 1995. dt�U7' �� Victor Kilm Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Assistant City Attomey DGV:dplccdocs\Knox.Res February 28, 1995 ri r r r r"i rl LUBBOCK TEXAS CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SBELTER RENOVATION «� 6y BID #13160 January 25, 1995 - -A -- S wf6d •i CITY OF LUBBOCK �z,=;5" Lubbock, Texas CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR BIDS FOR TITLE: CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 13160 PROJECT NUMBER 9931.9212 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND S. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS 11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE T r� l _ —. I-_ - L— L— U L. — LL� 4_— L--d L---. t —.-.e l--- t— t—_ L— L— `-- -- `-- NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #13160 Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 16th day of February.1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: CITY OF LUBBOCK AN04AL SHELTER RENOVATION After the expiration of the time and date above fast written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 9th day of Mar+ch,1995, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vemon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of P or or as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of BGR Architects and Engineers, 2118 34th Street, Lubbock, Texas, upon the deposit of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) as a guarantee of their safe return. The full amount of the deposit shall be returned if the documents are returned in good condition within ten (10) calendar days after the bid opening. ` Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award There will be a pre -bid conference on 9th day of Februan,1995, at 10:00 o'clock &Lr, in the Personnel Conference Room 108, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at least 48 bours in advance of the meeting. KOF L ;� SENIOR BUYER F ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID #13160 Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, Purchasing Department, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the Purchasing Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 16th day of Februarv,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Buyer and publicly read aloud. I The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the off ce of BGR Architects and Engineers, 2118 34th Street, Lubbock, Texas, upon the deposit of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) as a guarantee of their safe return. �.. The full amount of the deposit shall be returned if the documents are returned in good condition within ten (10) days after the bid opening. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the F contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on the 9tb day of February.1995, at 10:00 a.m., in the Personnel Conference Room 108, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. • • i- t�ii/,t (- t-,,L t--� C-�� I ' L-L C-- L---:� (-- 4,-- t- L�-- L- IL- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this r. project in accordance with contract documents for the City of Lubbock Animal Shelter Renovation. All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. I PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be frilly completed within 240 (Two Hundred Forty) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing,. provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the bes-I quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full .. responsibility of complying with this provision The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. t� r 1 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The P Contractor will .be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost r a a E t and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. t In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for i all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. is. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. - The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS P Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned The bidders' attention Ls, further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance wittu any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. r� (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract C , which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible *� copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each Ii day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate ¢ of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor.shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rej(uled and returned to the bidder without being considered. 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in r• and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to, do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of disc between the rice written in words and the rice written in figures, repancy p price gores, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal t signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an " official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. ,. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: w (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). r•� Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Insau lions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. I No Text BID PROPOSAL LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT l PLACE: .L!/ '�� 7�XAs' LATE:.E 701ECT NUMBER 13160 - CITY OF LUBBOCK ANMAL SHELTER RENOVATION `Proposal of /Z✓/Px, 7r4��Lrf%y 7 �kAzg' /le. (hereinafter called Bidder) 70 the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: he Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a_ `imng carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract Ocuments and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the qx)sed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to llll,onstruet the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the )rice stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. r `AATERIALS: G w.-�,...� a '/v.. � cs 17 2. el 9 TOTAL BID I 7RNATE 01: Polymer Coating AATERMLS: ;3--, 2 1. ¢MVICES: �WAL BID: �E � 3e z I t Y If , Q -3 !"" �.TERNATE #2: Additional Kennels and polymer coating ll `AATER1ALs: 7MVICES: .� ts.lLc� .rlcr (3� 2-1-7 TAL BID: `? Tom` /�.. , %�•. (�Z .,mount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) roll M P" Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within MO (TWO HUNDRED FORTY) cons;ecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated m the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set ,,,forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. �. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. r The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, u specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or l before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without r =':"M to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (S% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as tee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for . Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bound in the sum of Dollars which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damag& in the event the proposal is accepted by the P-Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents 7made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. ZSeal if Bidder is a Corporation) � " 4TTBST: E r-Secre tary 7 SAFECO BID BOND Conforms with The American Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Document No. A-310 SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON $8185 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, KNOX , GA I LEY & MEADOR , I NC. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, of Seattle, Washington, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Washington, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID ----------- ----------------------------- Dollars (S------- 5%------- ). for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION BID NO. 13160 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 16TH day of FEBRUARY , 19 g5 . Witness Witness KNOX , GA I LEY & MEADO , INC. (Seal) Principal DON MEADOR, SEC/TREASURER Title SAFECO IN CE C Y OF AMERICA By fHO%. WARD COWAN ttorney-in-Pact 5-541EP 2193 ® Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporstior. r i POWER OF ATTORNEY N0. KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AWRICA GENERAL INSURANCE COI*ANY OF AMERICA HONE OFFICE SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 08105 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation. does each hereby appoint ■■■■■■HOWARD COWAN; CAKLA ROGERS; KEVIN J. DUNN; MIKE HENTHORN; ANGIE GOFF; IMARLA HILL; RON STROMAN, Lubbock, Texas•■•■•■•■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■•■•■■■■■■■■■■■a■■■■■■■■■■■..■...■..■.■■■■■■.■... its true and lawful artorney(s)-in-fact. with full authority to execute on Its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character Issued in the course of its business. and to bind the respective company thereby. r IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents 7 PiERSCfI. S, , ,A.RY INS 4 t h day of January , 19 92 . CERTIFICATE DAN D A4:L"tar:. PRFSIDFN' Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: Amide V. Section 13. - FIDELRY Aim SURETY 80A= .. the President, any Vice President. the Secretary. and any Assistant Vice if President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations. shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys-M-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bands and other documents of similar character Issued by the cornpary in the course of its business ... 'On any instrument making or evidencing -such appointment. the signatures may be affixed by facstrnile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company. the seal. or a facsimile thereof. may be anpressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced: provided. however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking.' Extract from a Resolution of the Board of erectors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28. 1970. F-On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out. (0 The provisions of Article V. Section 13 of the By -Laws. and 00 A Copy of the power -of -attorney appdntment. executed pursuant thereto. and 010 Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect. ,the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof' t, R. A. Pierson, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA. rf hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directcrs of these corporations. and a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct. and that both the By -Laws. the Resolution and the Power of ` Attorney are still in full force and effect. 7N WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation f this 16TH day of FEBRUARY . 1995 *". o�C� okgr��c� 7 SEAL 1s sf 1953 c� h074/EP 1l03 Aj£ OF WASH�yG� p�kr,E C04f,, i CORPORATE �^ Q 9 W SEAL , x 1923 a� R A PiERSON. SEC RETAMY G■ Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation. BOND CHECK BEST RATING UCEN ED IN OAT By PAYMENT BOND (McGregor Act — Public Works) Texas SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 96195 Bond No.6788166 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That, we, KNOX , OA I LEY & MEADOR , INC. thereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, with its principal office in the City of Seattle, Washington, and authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds thereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK thereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of FOUR HUNDRED TH I RTY-ONE THOUSAND S I X HUNDRED NINETY-ONE AND NO/100--------------------- ------------------------- Dollars, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 9TH day of MARCH 1995 , to wit CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION BID NO. 13160 which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as If copied at length herein NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION /S SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him/her or a sub -contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 16TH day of MARCH 1996 KNOX, GA Y & ADOR, NC. (Seat) D MEADOR, SECRETARY/TREASURER Principal SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA (Seat) ByX twat} K EV I N J . oUvIr Attorney —in —Fact ® Registered Trademark of SAFECO Inswance Company S•21701EP 12197 PRINTRn w 11 e A r POWER I. M OF ATTORNEY No. [ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: SAFECO INSURANCE COWVANY OF AIAERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COWANY OF AWRICA NOME OFFICE SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 00185 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation. does each hereby a�ppppoint ■eeeesHOWARD COWAN; CARLA ROGERS; KEVIN J. DUNN; MIKE HENTHORN; ANGIE GOFF: MARLA HILL; RON STROMAN. Lubbock, TexaSeeefeaeeeareereeeescaeca•eereeeeeeseeee•areaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeere PM Its true and lawful attorney(:) -in -fact, with full authority to execute on Its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course Of its business. and to bind the respective company thereby. 7 i IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents r. EPczON :; C::.UA!',. this 4 t h day of January , 19 92 . DAN D M:LEA'J PRESIDENT CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: P•• •Article V. Section 13. - FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary. and any Assistant Vice 1 President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys -in -fact or under Other appropriate titles with authority to execute an behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character Issued by the company in the course of its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment. the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any Instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company. the seal. or a facsimile thereof, may be Impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced: provided. however. that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking.• Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. i. 1.0n any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out. (1) The provisions of Article V. Section 13 of the By -Laws. and 00 A copy of the power -of -attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto. and 011) Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect. Ithe signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seat of the Company may be a facsimli a thereof L R. A. Pierson Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, 71do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and P !of a Power Of Attorney Issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws, the Resolution and the Power of 'Attorney are still in full force and effect. ^IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation f t. this 16TH day of MARCH 19 95 . � �fi. CCkpq� SEAL c � b PM 3-9141EP U93 WAS OCORPORIATE COMP�^r' R.A PIERSOt.. SECR;TARY Oe Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation. PERFORMANCE BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATINGAq-- UCENSED My�! M ff;.'- 1- SAFECO PERFORMANCE BOND (McGregor Act — Public Works) Texas SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 08185 Bond No.6788166 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That, we, KNOX , GA I LEY & MEADOR , I NC - (hereinafter called the, Principal), as Principal, and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, with Its principal office in the City of Seattle, Washington, and authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds thereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound Leto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of FOUR HUNDRED TH I RTY-ONE THOUSAND S I X HUNDRED NINETY-ONE AND NO/100--------------------- ------------------------- Dollars, for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 9TH day of MARCH 1996 , to wit CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION BID NO. 13160 which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBL/GAT/ON IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 16TH day of MARCH 19 95 Witness. (Seal) Of Individual or Firm) Attest Of Corporation) (Sean KNOX, rAILEY " EADOR, INC. _(Sean Z2 L-- (Seal) Principal SAFECO INSURANeE JZOMPANY OF AMERICA (Sean S-21691EP IV93 Registered Trademark of SAFECO Insurance Company PRjNTEn iN at e e w CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ;_____________________________; 3/27/1995 77------------------------------------------------�------------------- '!PRODUCER — ,THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF , `'The Shropshire Agency, Inc. ;INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON ; W .O. Box 10428 ;THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IT DOES NOT AMEND, ; Lubbock, TX 79408 ;EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE ; ',(806) 763-7311 Fax 763-0556 ;POLICIES BELOW. ; '-------------------------------- '======' COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE '-------' INSURED ; COMPANY A: AETNA CASUALTY & SURETY CO. ; KNOX,GAILEY & MEADOR, INC. ; COMPANY B: TEXAS WRKRS'COMP INS FUND ; ;P.O. BOX 5736 ; COMPANY C: ; 'LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79417 ; COMPANY D• ; (806) 763-0418 COMPANY E• ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- COVERAGES'-----------------------------------' FThis is to certify that policies of insurance listed below have been issued to the insured named above for the policy period indicated, notwithstanding any requirement, term or condition of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate may be issued or may pertain, the insurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all the terms, Fexclusions and conditions of such policies. Limits shown may have been reduced by paid claims. CO:=: INSURANCE ;====; POLICY NUMBER ;==; DATES -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- :GENERAL LIABILITY; ; Effective;$ 2,000,000 General Agg ; A ;[X] Gen Liability;071GL82309OCCA ; 04/20/94 :$ 2,000,000 Prod/Coops Agg; ;[X] Occ C ] CM ; ; ;$ 1,000,000 Pers/Adv Ini ; ;[ ] OCP ; ;$ 1,000,000 Occurrence ; ^" A ] ; ;Expiration;$ 50,000 Fire Damage ; 04/20/95 :$ 5,000 Medical Exp --+-----------------+-------------------+----------+------•--------------------; ;AUTO LIABILITY ; Effective; ; A ;[X] Any Auto :071FJ1163911CCA ; 04/20/94 :$ 1,000,000 CSL `' ; ; [ X ] All Owned ;[X] Scheduled A X] Hired ;[X] Non —owned ; ;Expiration;$ BI (person) ; ;C ] Garage Liab ; ; 04/20/95 ;$ BI (accident) A PD ' p--+-----------------+-------------------+----------+--------------------------; ;EXCESS LIABILITY ; ; 04/20/94 ;$ 2,000,000 Occurrence ; A ;[X] Umbrella :071XS024144018CCA ; :$ 2,000,000 Aggregate A ] Other ; ; 04/20/95 ;--------------------------; --+-----------------+-------------------+----------;C ] Statutory Lmts; ;B ; WORKERS COMP ;TSF-110754-00 ; 04/20/94 :$ 1,000,000 Each Accident ; AND ; ; ;$ 1,000,000 Disease —Limit ; EMPLOYERS LIAB ; ; 04/20/95 :$ 1,000,000 Disease—Empl ; ------------------ rJA ;ALL RISK :071IB235407477 03/21/95 ;$ 5,000,000 ; ;BUILDERS RISK 03/21/96 A ; '----------------------------------------------------------•------------------ ' 7IDescription of operations/locations/vehicles/other RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION POLICY ISSUED IN NAME OF CONTRACTOR, HIS SUB —CONTRACTORS ; �. OWNER SHOWN AS ADD'L INSURED --INSURANCE IS SPECIFIC AS TO COVERAGE. ; --------------------------------------; CANCELLATION ;-----•-------------------; CERTIFICATE HOLDER ;=======;Should any of the above described policies; -----------------------------------;be cancelled before the expiration date ; ;thereof, the issuing company will endeavor; ;to mail 10 days written notice to the ; ;certificate holder named to the left, but ; . CITY OF LUBBOCK ;failure to mail such notice shall pose no 1625 — 13TH STREET ;obligation or liability of any kind upon ; LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 ;the com any 'ts agents or reps. ; Aa- =---------------------------------- - LZ I AVhtative;------ f" OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS • PROTECTIVE LIABILITY POLICY UFE&CASUALTY DECLARATIONS ® The ,Etna Casualty and Surety Company ❑ The Standard Fire Insurance Company ❑ The Automobile Insurance Company of Hartford, Connecticut Hartford, Connecticut 06156 ❑ ,Etna Casualty & Surety Company of Illinois Downers Grove, Illinois 60515 The declarations. coveraoe form. and endorsements comolete this insurance nolicv. NAMED INSURED AND MAILING ADDRESS POLICY NUMBER City of Lubbock 071 PC 5509699 CCA POLICY PERIOD FROM 3-27-95 TO 3-27-96 1625-13th Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 12:01 am STANDARD TIME AT THE N BED'S ADDRESS STATED HEREIN THE NAMED INSURED IS ❑ Individual ❑ Partnership BUSINESS OF NAMED INSURED Corporation Joint Venture Other. Municipalityl Munici alit n return for the payment of the premium, and subject to all the terms ot this policy, insurance is provided to by the Stock Insurance Company specified above. ;:: iLfCthE [SU AGGREGATE LIMIT $ 1,000,000. EACH OCCURRENCE LIMIT $ 1,000,000. EA 1F::::: .................... S C TEONPR ...............................-.............................................................. .......................... . U :»:;:>;;:s::;:;.>:;<:.>::>:::>>::>::::;>:.>::;:::>:::;::>.:::;::>::»< > EI1R.1 M .............................................:.....................:::.:..::::::.::.:.:::.:::,. CLASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION Construction Operations - Owner CLASS PREMIUM BASIS RATES CODE EXPOSURE COST PER $1,000 OF COST LOCATION OF COVERED OPERATIONS MINIMUM PREMIUM $ 266-00 City of Lubbock Animal Shelter Renovation TOTAL TERM POLICY PREMIUM $ ADVANCE PREMIUM $ 356.00 DESIGNATED NTRA TOR( ) AND CONTRACTOR'S MAILING ADDRESS - Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. TOTAL ADVANCE PREMIUM 356.00 P . 0. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79408 (Premium May be Subject to Adjustment) :?`<`..:i.isifi3i`tf:r::isr:r:Sr>:tCf:::5;:ffi,2`::`•+::i:'••>......:...:..........................................................,.....................................,.:•:::::::::.::::::::::..::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :.:..::....:.::.::.......:::::::.::.:.:::..:::::::.......• .. • :•:.:.::::..t�.2~tl1t AICAi3CE::TI>TFt1S:CGI~::>:::.::::;<::>:::>#.>:.:::::::::> <:::::::<::<::::;::: >:«: Table of Contents TITLE C059 NUMBER 01-86 Coverage of Operations of Designated Contractor 7G0009 11-85 Conditions Requiring Notice G2824 11-85 Amendment of Pollution Exclusion ZG2840 05-86 Texas Changes ZG2855 11-87 Additional Insured -Engineers, Architects or Surveyors ZG2007 11-85 .... ..........:..:::::r;:::>::>.::::::>:::::<:::>:;:::>::::•::.:.::......:.... i:N..TARS.E.G1!sIAT RL.........................>.......... �..1. .:.:..:..:::,:.:,:., :..,,,.,....... ..... ....... Countersigned on behalf of the above Company by: THE SHROPSHR AG , IN -27-95 me Ai3thorized A nt Countersignature Date READ YOUR POLICY CAREFULLY CAT. 766763 DCO27 (ED. 01-86) PRINTED IN U.S.A. Signed for the Company by: The ktna Casualty and Surety Company The Standard Fire Insurance Company The Automobile Insurance Company of Hartford, Connecticut Hartford, Connecticut 06156 �/Mx�cx— ,I lqr— Secretary ,-� 7-er- President ktna Casualty & Surety Company of Illinois Downers Grove, Illinois 60515 Secretary Vice President i PREMIUM BASIS Following are brief descriptions of the more common Premium Bases used in calculating the premium for your Owners --�. and Contractors Protective Liability Coverage. These descriptions are subject to more detailed manual rules in use by - the Company. 1. Cost. The total cost of all work performed for you by or on behalf of the designated contractor at the location indicated on the Declarations including: — (a) All labor, materials and equipment furnished, used or delivered for use in the project; and (b) All fees, bonuses or commissions made, paid or due . _ The rates apply per $1,000 of total cost. 2 Each. This basis of premium reflects units of exposure. Classifications will determine these units, such as "each permit". Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc. and. ISO Commercial Risk Services, Inc., with their permission. 1981 through current year, Copyrighted Insurance Services Office, Inc., and ISO Commercial Risk Services, Inc. No Text STATE OF TEXAS CONTRACT COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREIIv1ENT, made and entered into this 9th day of March. 1995, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and KNOX, GAMEY & MEADOR, INC. of the City of Lubbock. County of Lubbockand the State of TEXAS. hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #13160 - ANIMAL SHELTER RENOVATION FOR $431,691.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WAEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. APPROVED AS TOCONTENT: G- APPROVED AS TO FORM: ATTEST: Corporate Secretary CONTRACTOR , r 41 voX, ta-t By: Z�Z� COMPLETE ADDRESS- /- D• ,&X .57.3 I'' m GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR, INC. who has agreed - to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. i 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to CHARLES OVERSTREET, DVM, ANIMAL CONTROL SUPERVISOR City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR 7 The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contempLated. by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Represen=w ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. f 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all uses, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under P this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with r said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that theme shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a r„ written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision ` within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION �. It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time p such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the ` materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the; Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained: is, CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to famish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. ' Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve } the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof" either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to amaal expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method(c) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (1501a) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owners Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 1000/c, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered -in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT Vat any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. lf, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. r f t 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply azth the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contrail, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of S 1.000.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: ' Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) .� The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement i doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. p - B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows: For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, S 1.000.000 Combined Single Limit This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, 1,000, 000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of I00% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $2,000,000 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least 1,000,000 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self - insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC- 94), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096) - includes all persons or _ entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.. S. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and rfiling of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, _ Section 401.011(") for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the overage period shown on the current certificate of overage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of overage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of overage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the N coverage period, if the overage period shown on the current certificate of overage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year t thereafter, e (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. r. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance.with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. ..(9) A Contractor shall: -- (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; u, (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven (7) days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person nuay verity current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least nineteen (19) point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COMRAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensadan lnsuranc+e. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and ma aerials, or providing labor or transportation or oilier service related to the projec 4 regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Te= Workers' Congwtsalion Commission at 5IV440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify w*ether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage-" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; 29. 30. (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vu) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHWERY. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, matenalmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those .designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless i from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims t arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' r- Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING ..The Contractor further agrees.that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (One undrePER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and, Owner that time is of the essence of this contract.. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing t work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TRAE The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. OUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be famished under this contract, they arc approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the Project 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOMNG PROPERTY The Contractor.shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any.eertificate or payment be Considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less S% of the amount thereof, which S% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall itLpact the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and ?' shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract: and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this Contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsr'bility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 48. TRAE OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given my directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, maybe held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. r { In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: ' (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner or r } (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the =I under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Oliver had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the «jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms r" within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the f work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the that have not been rY ground included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Rep entative shall then make a final d statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 1001/o of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said spacial conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 53. LASSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or _ from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with hill, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the _ completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. No Text Resolution =2502 January 8, 1987 poll Agenda Item #18 DGV:da . RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 # enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 1 23, 1984; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works .contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987. iTE Ranette,Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED T ONTENT: Bi 1 P yne, D rector of Building Services B.C. McM—INN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: Donald G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate _ Acoustical Ceiling Installer $11.60 Air Conditioner Installer 8.35 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper_ 5.50 Bricklayer 10.50 Bricklayer -Helper 5.00 Carpenter 11.00 -- Carpenter-Helper 5.50 Cement Finisher 7.35 Drywall Hanger 8.70 Electrician 10.50 Electrician -Helper 5.25 Equipment Operator - Heavy 8.00 Light 5.70 Floor Installer 8.00 Glazier 7.50 Insulator, Piping/Boiler 9.50 Insulator -Helper 5.00 Iron Worker 7.30 Laborer, General 4.75 Mortar Mixer 5.60 Painter 8.75 Plumber 9.25 — Plumber -Helper 6.00 Roofer 7.65 Roofer -Helper 4.75 Sheet Metal Worker 8.75 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 5.50 Welder - Certified 8.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grade Operator. Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light Heavy Hourly Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.25 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman - $11.00 Lineman Journeyman 10.45 Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series 7.25 EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E ' Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is.1 1/2 times base rate. x U F11 7 w, F , CITY OF LUBBOCK ANIMAL SHELTER LUBBOCK, TEXAS BGR ARCHITECTS -ENGINEERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS �40 AR�y C2 o�,o W. H ��► r� � 4 jf.pw • Ids,'" I- a4, °q VX P. i - 01100 - Alternates ----------------------------------- 1 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ------ 1 thru 3 01630 - Substitution and Product Options ------------- 1 thru 2 01700 - Contract Closeout Requirements --------------- 1 thru 5 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02200 - Excavating, Filling and Grading -------------- 1 thru 9 02281 - Soil Poisoning for Termite Control ----------- 1 thru 2 02444 - Chain Link Fencing --------------------------- 1 thru 4 02500 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving -------------------- 1 thru 6 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 - Concrete Work -------------------------------- 1 thru 8 03600 - Precast Polymer Concrete Trench Drain-------- 1 thru 2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY - NOT USED DIVISION 5 - METALS 05400 - Lightgage Steel Framing ---- - -------- -------- l thru 3 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals ------------------------- 1 thru 3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 - Carpentry ------------------------------------ 1 thru 4 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07150 - Dampproofing--------------------------------- 1 thru 2 07210 - Building Insulation -------------------------- 1 thru 2 07600 -Sheet Metal Work ----------------------------- 1 thru 2 07900 - Caulking and Sealants ------------------------ 1 thru 3 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 - Custom Hollow Metal Work --------------------- 1 thru 3 08300 - Special Doors -------------------------------- 1 thru 2 08700 - Finish Hardware ------------------------------ 1 thru 6 page 1 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Drywall Construction------------------- 1 thru 5 - 09500 Acoustical Ceiling Systems 1 thru 3 09700 — Polymer Floor Coating ------------------------ 1 thru 3 09900 - Painting and Finishing ---------------- -- --- 1 thru 6 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10521 - r 10800 - Fire Extinguishers - Hand Units -------------- Toilet Accessories --------------------------- 1 1 thru thru 2 3 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11001 Special Equipment --------------------- ------ 1 thru 4 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS AND SEATING - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121 - Pre -Fabricated Metal Building ---------------- 1 thru 7 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 - 15020 - General -------------------------------------- Testing 1 1 thru thru 9 2 15060 - Piping --------------------------------------- 1 thru 6 15250 - Insulation ----------------------------------- 1 thru 2 15400 Plumbing ------------------------------------- 1 thru 3 l - 15650 Air Conditioning 1 thru 3 15840 - Ductwork ------------------------------------- 1 thru 2 15870 - Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers ----- 1 thru 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 - General Electrical Provisions ---------------- 1 thru 5 16110 Raceways ------------------------------------- 1 thru 4 - 16120 Conductors 1 thru 2 16130 - Boxes and Fittings --------------------------- 1 thru 3 16134 - Panelboards---------------------------------- I thru 2 16140 - Wiring Devices ------------------------------- I thru 2 16170 - Switches and Fuses --------------------------- 1 thru 2 16450 - Grounding ------------------------------------ I thru 3 16500 Lighting ------------------- 1 thru 3 - 16770 ----------------- Sound/Intercom System - -- -- 1 thru 2 page 2 SECTION 01100 - ALTERNATES 1.01 GENERAL: A. The Contractor shall submit with his bid, alternate proposal stating the difference in price (additions or deductions) from the total estimate for adding or changing the following materials or construction from that shown on the drawings and specified. B. The difference in prices shall include all omissions, additions, and adjustments of all trades as may be necessary because of each change, substitution or omission. C. All work and materials required by alternates shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of the specifications. D. Failure to submit alternate amounts in spaces provided on Proposal shall be basis for disqualification of bid. 1.02 ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1 If Alternate No. 1 is accepted, the Contractor shall provide a polymer coating on the floor slab in the addition, in lieu of sealer. NOTE: This alternate does not apply to any part of the Existing Animal Shelter Facility. Alternate No. 2 If Alternate No. 2 is accepted, the Contractor shall perform all work within the Existing Animal Shelter Facility (remove existing masonry/chain link kennels, install new kennels and new polymer coating on floor in ISOLATION KENNELS, install ramp in CAT KENNELS 3), and shall provide standard kennels in lieu of isolation kennels in KENNEL 101 of the Addition. NOTE: All work required to connect Hall 107 to existing building at HALLWAY shall be in the Base Bid. End of Section r 01100 - 1 F SECTION 01340 — SHOP DRAWINGS PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES y, 1.01 GENERAL: A. Refer to General Conditions, Article 3.12. B. Submit to the Architect shop drawings, product data and samples required by specification sections. C. Prepare and submit a list of required submittals of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. List submittal items in numerical order of specification section numbers. Identify each submittal in list with an item number, specification section number, name of product and type of submittal (Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples). Include dates for submission and need dates for each item. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the work, showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. B. Reproductions for Submittals: Reproducible transparency with one opaque print. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA: - A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to Project. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to Project. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances ,required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 1.04 SAMPLES: A. Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment and workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work is judged. B. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Erect at Project site at location acceptable to Architect. 2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete including work of all trades required in finished work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission. Initial, sign, or stamp, certifying to review of submittal. B. Verify: I. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and contract documents. 01340 - 1 D. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals. E. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. F. Notify Architect, in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. G. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect's stamp and initials or signature indicating review. H. After Architect's review, distribute copies. 1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: A. Schedule submissions at least 21 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed, in accordance with approved submittal schedule. B. Submit 1 reproducible transparency and one opaque print of shop drawings. C. Submit number of copies of product data which Contractor requires for, d.istribution, plus 3 copies which will be retained by Architect. D. Submit number of samples specified in each of specification sections. E. Accompany each submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Data and Sample submitted. 5. Notification of deviations from Contract Documents. - 6. Other pertinent data. F. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title. 3. Names of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product or material. 5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Applicable reference standards: 8. Other pertinent data required by Specifications. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.. 11. Space large enough to accept Architect's approval stamp (3" x 1- 1/2"). 1.07 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Architect. 01340 - 2 B. Product Data and Samples• Submit, new data and samples as required for initial submittal. 1.08 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW: A. Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Architect's stamp as required for construction, including Contractor's file, job site file, record documents file, other prime contractors, subcontractors, supplier and fabricator. End of Section 01340 - 3 SECTION 01630 - SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS r 1.01 PRODUCT LIST: A. Within 14 days after date of contract, submit to the Architect 5 copies of complete list of products and materials which are proposed for installation. B. Prepare list on basis of each specification section. C. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each product: 1. Name and address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data, including performance and test data, reference standards. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS: A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer. B. for products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any product and manufacturer named. C C. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option, unless a substitution is approved as specified below. D. Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and PM governing regulations, not by previous project experience. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. During bidding, Architect will consider written requests from prime Bidders for substitutions, received at least 10 days prior to bid date. Approval of proposed substitutions will be set forth in an addendum or letter of approval. Requests for substitutions shall include data listed below. B. Within 14 days after date of contract, Architect will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitutions of products in place of those specified. C. Submit 4 copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. 2. For products: Project identification, including manufacturer's name and address. Manufacturer's literature, including product description, performance and test data and reference standards. Samples, if applicable. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. 3. For construction methods: Detailed written descriptions of proposed method. Complete drawings illustrating methods or revisions. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. D. In making request for substitution, Bidder/Contractor represents: 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. F01630 - 1 2. He will provide same warranty for the substitution that he would for the product specified. 3. He certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under the Contract. except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent. 4. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such 'changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 5. He will assume full responsibility for additional cost and expenses for the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and all other contractors. E. Substitutions will not be considered if: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request submitted in accord with Article 1.03 of this section. 2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. F. If substitution is not approved -or accepted, Contractor shall furnish specified product. End of Section 01630 - 2 F SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 FINAL CLEANING: In addition to requirements of General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, the following shall apply A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. B. At completion of construction and just prior to acceptance or occupancy, conduct final inspection of exposed interior and exterior surfaces and perform final cleaning. C. Final cleaning shall include all sweeping, dusting, vacuuming, dry and wet mopping, polishing, buffing, and other operations necessary, including supplies and equipment required. Also remove temporary tape, wrappings, coatings, labels, grease, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces. D. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. E. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. F. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. G. Clean cabinets and casework. H. Dust and wash plumbing and electrical fixtures. I. Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc., shall be cleaned as necessary to leave work in condition ready for immediate occupancy by Owner. J. Hose down and scrub all new and existing concrete and asphalt paving and walks soiled as result of work. Rake clean other surfaces of grounds K. All debris, surplus material, and other items specified or indicated for removal shall become property of Contractor and shall be legally disposed of off -site. L. Contractor shall promptly remove from building, job site, sidewalks, and streets all rubbish and dirt due to work done under contract. At completion of work, he shall completely clean areas in which work has been done, including glass, and leave building broom -clean and ready for occupancy. 1.02 FINAL INSPECTION: A. Contractor determines work shown and specified has been completed: 1. Informs Architect in writing that work is ready for inspection. 2. If Architect concurs upon inspection, Owner is notified in writing that work is ready for Owner's inspection. 3. If Owner concurs, a Final Inspection for substantial completion will be:scheduled. B. Representatives will participate in Final Inspection:. 1. Architect and Engineer 2. Contractor and Major Subcontractors 3. Owner's Representative C. Architect develops master "punch list" from comments produced by Final Inspection: 1. Copies to Contractor as required to expedite correction of items contained in "punch list." 01700 - 1 F 1.03 PERMANENT KEYS: At final inspection, Contractor shall place correct key in each lock, appropriately tagged for positive identification. Permanent keys for whatever purpose (finish hardware, mechanical equipment, casework, switches, electrical panels, fire alarm system panels, fire hose cabinets, elevator, etc.) shall be released only to Owners designated representative. Distribution of keys will be made by Owner's designated representative. 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FINAL PAYMENT: A. Project Record Documents: 1. Related requirements specified elsewhere: a.General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions b. Special Conditions c. Submittals, Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2. Project Record Documents are defined as "As -Built" Records which include but are not limited to the following: Contract Drawings, Record Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, Change Letters, Change Order, negotiated changes, other modifications to the Contract, Field Test Reports, approved submittal data, equipment operation, and maintenance manuals. 3. Submit two (2) copies each of above to Architect for review and approval, one (1) copy of which shall be returned to Contractor approved or with instruction for changes. After approval, submit three (3) copies to Architect who will forward two (2) copies to Owner for his information and use. 4. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" and accompany each submittal with transmittal letter in triplicate containing: -date, project title, Architect's project number, Contractor's name and address, title of eachrecord document, certification -in writing that each document, as submitted, is complete and accurate, and signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. 5. 'All the above shall be submitted prior to Final Payment to Contractor. B. Contract Record Drawings: Upon completion of construction and prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide Architect with clean, complete set of ozalid prints marked to record actual construction showing all deviations from, additions to, or changes in Contract Drawings including but not limited to: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation and drilled piers in relation to first floor level: 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3.` Location of internal utilities concealed in construction -- referenced to visible and accessible features of structure, if significantly different than that shown on Drawings. 4. Field changes of dimension and details. 5. Changes made by Change Letters, Change Order, or Field Order. 6. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 7. Architectural changes shall be noted as well as structural, mechanical, and electrical. 01700 - 2 C. Specifications and Addenda: Upon completion of construction and prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide Architect with clean, complete set of Specifications and Addenda, each Section marked to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number of each product, and item of equipment actually installed 2. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 3. Other matters not originally specified. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Index: 1. Prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide maintenance information and operation instructions for equipment and systems installed. 2. Prepare operating and maintenance instructions for equipment, particularly Mechanical and Electrical, that will require adjustment, servicing, or attention for its proper operation. 3. Provide following data bound in a neat brochure: a. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and directions. b. Repair parts lists of major equipment items shall include R names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local suppliers and companies servicing installed equipment. c. Valve tag charts and diagrams. d. List of products incorporated in work, referenced to Specification Section if other than product specified. e. Provide an -Index listing equipment referenced to Specification Sections. 4. Operating instructions for heating, cooling, and other mechanical systems necessary for Owner to make full and r- efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures. i. 5. Submit two (2) copies of instructions to Architect for review and approval, one (1) copy of which shall be returned to Contractor approved or with instructions for changes. After approval, submit three (3) copies of instructions covering equipment to Architect who will forward two (2) copies to Owner for information and use. E. Approved Mechanical and Electrical Submittal Data: Prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide three (3) copies Mechanical and electrical Submittal Data to Architect who will forward two (2) copies to Owner for information and use. c F. Addenda and Negotiated Changes: Prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of Addenda and Negotiated Changes to r" Architect who will forward two (2) copies to Owner for information and use. G. Elevator Maintenance and Operating Manual: 1. Prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide two (2) copies of Maintenance Manual to Architect, including operation instructions, record wiring diagrams, parts list, lubrication and maintenance requirements, and safety procedures which will be forwarded to Owner for information and use. 2. Provide three (3) copies of manufacturer's certification to Architect that elevator equipment was installed in accordance *- with referenced codes and standards. F01700 - 3 3. 'Provide toArchitecttwo (2)`copies of one (1) year warranty for maintenance and parts from time of Owner's substantial completion or use by Owner, whichever is earlier. H. Warranties, Guarantees, and Bonds: 1. Prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall provide to the Architect three (3) copies of all warranties, guarantees, and bonds required in various sections of Specifications. 2. Written Warranty Contractor shall submit to Architect three (3) copies of a warranty written on Contractor's letterhead and in form approved by Architect, for work, materials, and equipment for period of one (1) year. 3. Guarantees: Where guarantees for periods beyond one (1) year from date of final acceptance for work are required, such guarantees shall be written, and three (3) copies furnished to the Architect, on Contractor's letterhead using the following format: "GUARANTEE FOR We hereby guarantee that the which we have installed on the (project name, project address & location) has been done in accordance with the drawings and specifications, and that the work as installed will fulfill the requirements of the Guarantee included in the Specifications. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our work, together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or materials within a period of (insert guarantee period) year(s) from date of acceptance of the above mentioned structure by the (Owner's name) ' ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within a reasonable time, which in no case shall be longer than thirty (30) days after being notified in writing by the (Owner name), we collectively or separately do hereby authorize the (Owner Name) to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense', and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefor upon demand." Signed Subcontractor and/or Supplier Countersigned Prime Contractor 4. Warranty and Guarantee periods shall commence on the date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion unless otherwise specified. 01700 - 4 i 1.05 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS: After submission of written instructions and prior to Final Payment, Contractor shall furnish competent operation engineer or engineers at such time or times as directed by Architect to meet with Owner or his representatives, to fully explain instructions and to demonstrate and fully familiarize Owner or his representatives with equipment and phases of its operation and maintenance. Amount of time devoted to instructions shall be reasonable and consistent with size of installation and its complexity. Instructions shall be adequate to the extent that Owner's personnel may proceed with normal operations in a safe and efficient manner. 1.06 FINAL PAYMENT: t. A. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. GENERAL CONDITIONS: *� a. Article 9.8 - Substantial Completion b. Article 9.10 - Final Completion and Final Payment 2. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS: a. Article 9.10 - Final Completion and Final Payment 3. SECTION 01700: CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS as applicable. B. Submit two (2) sets of the following to Architect who will forward one (1) copy to Owner: 1. Certificate of Substantial Completion, AIA form G704. 2. Certificate of Punch List Completion: a. On Contractors letterhead b. Copy of Punch List attached. 3. Change Order: a. AIA form G701 b. Incorporates Change Letters and deducts remainder of the r Allowance from Contract amount. c. All Change Letters, back-up material, and authorizations. 4. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment -of Debts and Claims, AIA form ,• G706 . 5. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA form G706A. 6. Consent of Surety Company for Final Pay ment, AIA form G707. C. Submit request on three (3) Application and Certificate for Payment, AIA Document G702-1983, supported by AIA Document G703-1983, .. Continuation Sheet, all marked ESTIMATE NO. _, FINAL. F End of Section 01700 - 5 r r SECTION 02200 EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING l PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide all clearing, excavating, filling, grading, and related items necessary to complete work shown on drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Special Conditions -Section 01010 Paving - Section 02500 Termite Control - Section 02281 Concrete Work - Section 03300 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Provide and place any additional material required to bring existing grades to new sub -grades indicated or specified. B. Utility lines encountered during excavation shall be brought to the Architect's attention immediately. Active utilities passing under the building area will be relocated by the various Contractors concerned, unless otherwise noted or shown. 1.05 SAFETY CODES AND STANDARDS: A. Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. All excavations shall be performed in accordance with the standards set forth in "Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) Standards for Excavation Work and Shoring." B. Reference Standards: ASTM D698-78 Moisture Density of Soils/Aggregates Mixture Test. 1.06 TESTING: Cost of laboratory test shall be paid by the Owner - see Special Conditions - Section 01010. 1.07 USE OF EXPLOSIVES: Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work. 1.08 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY: A. Barricade open excavations and post with warning lights for safety of persons. Operate warning lights during hours from duskto dawn each day. B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations, from damage, caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards. F02200 - 1 F C. Take precautions and provide necessary bracing and shoring to guard _ against movement or settlement of existing improvements or new construction. Contractor is entirely responsible for strength and adequacy of bracing and shoring, and for safety .and support of construction from damage or injury caused by the lack thereof or by ` movement or settlement. 1.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES: �. A. The drawings indicate the extent of site clearing required by the Contract. No trees outside of the improved area shall be damaged or removed without written approval of the Architect. Trees to remain within the improved area are indicated on the drawings and shall be protected as herein specified. B. Protect existing trees indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary fences, barricades or guards as required to protect trees to be left standing. C. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2" diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat the cut faces with an -- emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, especially formulated for horticultural use on cut or damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover all exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out, provide earth cover as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to the Architect. Tree damage repair shall be performed by a qualified tree surgeon. Replace trees which cannot �- be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by the tree surgeon. 1.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: A. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. B. Restore any improvements damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to the Owners or other parties or authorities having jurisdiction. — PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING: A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, weeds and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions that interfere with installation of new construction. Also, remove such items elsewhere on the site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes new and old stumps of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct new construction. B. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. 02200 - 2 C. Strip topsoil to whatever,.depths encountered, and in such manner as to prevent intermingling'-- with the" underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. D. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to the main root system. E. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING: A. Clear the improved area site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. B. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through the ground surface. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside the drip line,of trees indicated to be left standing. C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation. or earthwork is indicated. D. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL: A. Burning of combustible material shall not be permitted. B. Excess and Waste Material: Transport excess and waste materials from the Owner's property and legally dispose of it. C. Excavated Materials Under Building: Material indicated to be removed from under the building may be redeposited in fill. areas outside the building area where grading will permit. This material shall not be used under walks, roads, or other paved areas, unless it meets applicable specifications for fill material as herein specified. 3.04 EXCAVATION: A. Preparation: 1. Site shall be cleared of structures, foundations, pavements, utility lines, debris, fences and other obstructions within the contract limits. 2. Debris and obstructions outside building lines shall be removed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below finish grade. Existing basement walls, floors, cisterns, underground tanks and similar structures shall be removed in entirety wherever located on the site. B. General Requirements: 1. Footings may be excavated to dimensions of the concrete work and poured without forms if the nature of the soil will permit. All exposed to view concrete surfaces will be formed as specified in Section 03300. 2. Concrete walls and piers other than beams specified above will be formed each side. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated on the plans plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms required, and permit inspection of forms. 3. Protect all excavations from frost. Concrete will not be placed on frozen ground. 02200 - 3 C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specified direction of Architect. D. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation _ of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, only when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as .specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Monolithic Slab and Beam System: 1. Remove brown topsoil for total depth found from the proposed building area. Remove additional material as necessary to meet requirements of item 2 below. Compact the top 6 inches of -- exposed sub -grade to 95% of maximum density (plus or minus 2%) - at optimum moisture content, using Test Procedures cited in Paragraph entitled "Selection and Placement of fill; _ Compaction". 2.Immediately below the concrete slab, at least 12 inches shall be selected and compacted fill in accordance with Paragraph entitled "Selection and Placement of Fill Beneath Soil Supported Slabs." Where fill is required below the first 12 inches, light colored, calcareous gravelly soil taken from cuts on the site may be used. This soil shall be compacted as specified for the 12" layer of fill immediately below the concrete slab. 3. Excavate exterior and interior haunched beam trench into the select and compacted fill. 4. Sides of excavations shall be true, and neatly trimmed. 5. Bottom of beams shall extend into the compacted subgrade. Should scheduled depths not permit the above requirements, the Architect shall have the privilege of revising the scheduled depth. In this event, adjustment in the contract price will be made using the unit prices submitted in the proposal: G. Spot Footings: r' 1 Spot footing excavations shall be made only after accurately sized templates are properly positioned and checked by the Architect. -- 2. Sides of footings excavations shall be true, parallel to the building lines, and neatly trimmed. 3. Bottoms of excavations for footings shall be at the proper elevation, flat, ` and free of all loose dirt and debris. Should suitable bearing not be found at the contract elevation, the Architect shall have the privilege of revising the elevation to a greater depth. - In this event, adjustments in the contract price will be made using the unit prices submitted in the proposal. H. Stability of Sides: Slope sides of excavations over 5' deep to angle of repose of material excavated; otherwise, shore, and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of 'material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling, by scaling, benching shelving, or bracing. 02200 - 4 Take precautions to prevent slides. or cave-ins when excavations are made in locations adjacent to backfilled excavations, and when sides of excavations are subjected to vibrations from vehicular traffic or the operation of machinery, or any other source. J. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Provide minimum requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with ANSI A10.1 "Safety Code for Building Construction", and with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. K. Dewatering: Perform earthwork in a manner to prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations, and to prevent water from flooding project site and surrounding area. Excavated materials shall be stockpiled and graded at all times in such manner as to convey the surface water away from the trenches or excavations. i i Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water using dewatering methods which will prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. L. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backf i l l or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain materials away from edge of excavations, even though such excavations may be sheeted and braced, to prevent such material falling or sliding into the excavations to prevent cave- ins. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials, such as unsatisfactory excavated soil material, trash and debris, as specified herein. M. Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.171, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and for ,. other construction required, and for inspection. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. N. All work in connection with excavation shall be performed in accordance with the standards set forth in "Occupational Safety Standard for Excavation Work and Shoring." F 02200 - 5 3.05 SELECTION AND PLACEMENT OF FILL: _ A. Selection and Placement of Fill Beneath Soil Supported Monolithic Slabs: 1. Selection: Select fill shall meet the following requirements: Maximum Plasticity Index: 12 Minimum Plasticity Index: 3 No stones larger than 1-1/2" 2. Compaction: Select fill shall be compacted in the field is not P P to exceed 6" lifts to a minimum of 95% of ASTM D698-78. Laboratory moisture -density curve or curves as required, and results of at least 4 field density checks per lift are to be submitted to the Architect or Engineer. Compaction procedures are to be approved by the Architect or designated soil engineer. Samples of proposed select fill shall be furnished to the testing laboratory 7 days prior to installation to permit time for specification compliance inspection and approval. 3. Top six inches (6") immediately below the slab within the building shall be sand as approved by the Architect. Sand shall be free of all foreign matter and shall be compacted to 95% maximum density- B. Compaction: (Monolithic and Beam System Compaction is Specified -- Above.) 1. General: Perform compaction of soil materials for backfills and fills using suitable soil compaction equipment for materials to be compacted and work area locations. Contro lsoil compaction during construction for compliance with -percentage of maximum density specified .for each area classification. 2. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Provide not less than the following percentages of maximum density of the same soil material compacted at optimum moisture content, for the actual density of each layer of soil material -in -place. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% of ASTM D698-78 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 90% maximum density for cohesive soil material. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12 of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% of ASTM D698-78 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 90% maximum density for cohesive soil material. Lawn or Unpaved Areas Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% of ASTM D698-78 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 85% maximum density for cohesive soil material, Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade.and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% of ASTM D698-78 maximum density for cohesionless soils, and 90% maximum density for cohesive soil material. _ 3. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface or subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 02200 - 6 r i f Remove and replace, or,'scarify and. air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction or specified density. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread where directed by Architect and permitted to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value, as determined by moisture - density relation tests. When accepted by Architect, soil material may used by compacted backfill or fill. t= C. Backfill and Fill: 1. General: a. Backfill consists of placement of acceptable soil material in layers, in excavations to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. b. Fill consists of placement of acceptable soil materials, in layers, over ground surface to required elevations, for each area classification listed below. c. Backfill and Fill Materials: Selection: Select fill shall meet the following requirements: Maximum Plasticity Index: 12 r, Minimum Plasticity Index: 3 € No stones larger than 1-1/2" Provide acceptable soil materials for backfill and fill, free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable c; matter, and other deleterious matter. In excavations, use excavated or borrow material that has been tested and approved. Under grassed areas, use excavated or borrow material that has been tested and approved. Under walks and pavements, use subbase material, or excavated or borrow material, or combination of both, that has been tested and approved. d. Prior to Backfill Placement: Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the ' following: Acceptance by Architect of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Inspect, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities. r^ Removal of concrete formwork. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Removal of trash and debris. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. e. Preparation of Ground Surface to Receive Fill: Remove r vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, .. obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. When existing ground surface has a density less than that r02200 - 7 r specified under "Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to the. optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. f. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 in loose depth. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each, layer as necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 3.06 GRADING: A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact and with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. NOTE: Site drainage away from the building shall be maintained throughout the construction period! B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structure and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10' above or below the required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section,- with finish surface not more than 0.10' above or below the required subgrade elevation. Finish grade shall be 2" below finish walks, curbs and other paved or concrete construction. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade. and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 112" above or below the required subgrade elevation. 4.= Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/4" when tested with a 10' straightedge. 5. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area - classification. C. Maintenance: 1. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas. to specified tolerances. 2. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations, or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 02200 - 8 I F rwk Li is 3.07 TOP SOIL: A. Redeposit topsoil over all areas except walks, pavements and/or other improvements. Redepositing of topsoil shall not begin until all fill/backfill and subgrading operations have been completed. All debris and stones of 1/2" or more in diameter shall be removed by harrowing and hand raking to obtain a fine finished seed bed. Top soil shall be redeposited to a compacted depth of four (4) inches. End of Section 02200 - 9 C: r .- SECTION 02281 - SOIL POISONING FOR TERMITE CONTROL F 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Furnish and apply soil poisoning for termite control. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Excavating, Filling and Grading - Section 02200 Concrete - Section 03300 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicator Qualifications: Registered or licensed where required by state, county or city jurisdictions. B. Guarantee: On final acceptance furnish Owner written five (5) year guarantee of effectiveness of treatment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit copies of manufacturer's mixing and application instructions. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 121120�2 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Toxicants: All soil poisons shall be water -based emulsions. Oil - based emulsions will not be acceptable. B. Chemicals: Provide a working solution of one of the following chemical elements and concentrations: Dursban TC, 1.0% solution. Pryfon, 0.75% solution. Dragnet, 0.5% solution Torpedo, 0.5% solution. 2.02 MIXES: A. Follow manufacturer's mixing instructions. 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Verify that soil is in proper condition with moisture content low enough to permit absorption of toxicant solution. B. Do not begin work until earthwork for slab placement has been completed. 02281 - 1 1. 3.02 APPLICATION: A. The application of soil poisons shall be made during normal working hours and at least twelve (12) hours prior to placement of concrete slabs. B. Apply soil treatment uniformly to areas beneath concrete floor slabs on grade or fill, and along interior sides of foundation walls and grade beams. C. Where exterior is abutted by concrete slabs, asphalt paving or other -� permanent surfacing, treat exterior sides of foundation walls and grade beams as specified for interior sides of such walls and treat ground area for a distance not less than three (3) feet from the building. D. Rate of Application: 1. Building Areas (including sidewalks adjacent to building): Apply soil treatment at minimum rate of one (1) gallon to each ten (10) square feet of area under slabs on grade or fill within building. 2. Foundation Walls: Treat soil along foundation walls and grade r beams at rate of 2 gallons per 5 lineal feet. 3. Miscellaneous: Apply soil treatment at the rate of 2 gallons per 5 lineal feet immediately below expansion joints, control joints and areas where slab will be penetrated by construction features and where exterior facings or veneers extend below grade level along exterior side of foundation walls, or where masonry foundation construction is used. r-- End of Section 02281 - 2 SECTION 02444 - CHAIN LINK FENCING i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide chainlink fence elsewhere as shown on the Drawings, complete with sides, top, and lockable gates. 1. Galvanized steel systems 2. Swing gates 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Concrete - Section 03300 i 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Standards of Manufacture: Comply with the standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute for "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric" and as herein specified. B. Provide each type of steel fence and gates as a complete unit r- produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data; Steel Fences and Gates: Submit copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for steel fences and gates. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B. Shop Drawings; Steel Fences and Gates: Submit shop drawings for steel fences and gates, including plan layout and details illustrating fence height, location and sizes of posts, rails. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: Pipe sizes indicated are commercial pipe sizes. Tube sizes ,. indicated are nominal outside dimension. H-section sizes are nominal flange dimensions. Roll -formed section sizes are the nominal outside dimensions. 2.02 FINISH FOR FRAMEWORK AND APPURTENANCES: Provide the following galvanized finishes for steel framework and appurtenances with not less than minimum weight of zinc per sq. ft., complying with the following: A. Pipe: ASTM A 120 (1.8 oz. zinc psf) B. Square tubing: ASTM A 123 (2.0 oz. zinc psf) C. H-sections: ASTM A 123 (2.0 oz. zinc psf) D. Hardware and Accessories: ASTM A 153 (zinc weight per_Table I). 2.03 FABRIC: A. Furnish chain link fabric as follows: One-piece fabric widths. No. 9 ga. (0.148") wires. 2" mesh. 02444 - 1 Top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed for fabric over 60" high knuckled 60" and under. Galvanized finish with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft., complying with ASTM A 392, Class I. 2.04 POSTS, RAILS AND BRACES: A. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Furnish end, corner, and pull posts of the minimum sizes and weights as follows.. 1. Up to 6' fabric height: 2.875" OD pipe weighing 5.79 lbs. per lin. ft. 2.50" square tubing weighing 5.79 lbs. per lin ft. 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" roll -formed section weighing 4.85 lbs. per lin. ft. B. Line Posts: Furnish line posts of the minimum sizes and weights as follows. 1. Up to 6' fabric height: 1.90" OD pipe weighing 2.72 lbs. per lin. ft. 1.875" x 1.625" roll -formed section weighing 2.70 lbs. per lin. ft. C. Swing Gate posts: Furnish gate posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a'double gate installation, for nominal gate widths as follows: 1. Up to 6' wide: 2.875" OD pipe weighing 5.79 lbs. per lin. ft. 2-1/2" square tubing weighing 5.80 lbs. per lin. ft. 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" roll -formed section weighing 4.85 lbs per lin. ft. 2. Over 6' and up to 13' wide: 4" OD pipe weighing 9.10 lbs. per lin. ft. D. Top Rails: Furnish top rails in manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion type couplings,approximately 6" long, for each joint. Provide means for attaching the top rail securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. Top rails shall be one of the following: 1.660" OD pipe weighing 2.27 lbs. per lin. ft. 1.625" x 1.25" roll -formed sections weighing 1.35 lbs. per lin. ft. E. Post Brace Assembly: Furnish bracing assemblies at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with the horizontal brace located at mid -height of the fabric. Use 1.660" OD pipe weighing 2.27 lbs. per tin. ft. for horizontal brace and 3/8" diameter rod with turnbuckle for diagonal truss. F. Tension Wire: Furnish tension wire consisting of galvanized 7 gage coiled spring wire. Locate at bottom of fabric only. G. Post Tops: Pressed steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron, designed as a weathertight closure cap (for tubular posts). Furnish one cap for each post unless equal protection is afforded by combination post top cap and barbed wire supporting arm. Furnish caps with openings to permit through passage of the top rail. H. Stretcher Bars: One piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with a minimum cross-section of 3/16" x 3/4". Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into the post. 02444 : 2 J. Stretcher Bar.Bands: Steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron, spaced not over 15" o.c. to secure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull, and gate posts. Bands may also be used with special fittings for securing rails to end, corner, pull and gate posts. 2.05 GATES: A. Fabricate swinging gate perimeter frames of tubular members. Provide additional horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware and accessories. Size as follows: 1. 6' high with leaf width 8' or less: 1.660" OD pipe weighing 2.27 lbs. per lin. ft. t 1-1/2" square tubing weighing 1.90 lbs. per lin. ft. 2. Vertical members: 1.90" OD pipe weighing 2.176 lbs. per lin. ft. or Schedule 40 pipe weighing 2.72 lbs. per lin. ft. 3. Diagonal members: 1.660" OD pipe weighing 1.816 lbs. per lin. ft.. or Schedule 40 pipe weighing 2.272 lbs. per lin. ft. 4. Top and bottom wire: No. 7 gage tension wire 5. Fabric: No. 9 gauge 2" mesh, knuckled top and bottom selvages B. Assemble gate frames by welding or with special malleable or pressed steel fittings and rivets for rigid connections. Use same fabric as for fence, unless otherwise indicated. Instal-1 fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to gate frame at not more than 15" O.C. Attach hardware with rivets or by other means which will provide security against removal or breakage. C. Install diagonal cross -bracing consisting of 3/8" diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates where necessary to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. D. Swinging Gate Hardware: Furnish the following hardware and accessories for each gate: 1. Hinges: Pressed or forged steel or malleable iron to suit gate Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. 3. Double Gates: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type or flush plate with anchors. Set in concrete to engage the center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking r' device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, using F one padlock for locking both gate leaves. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES: A. Wire Ties: For tying fabric to line posts, use 9 ga. wire ties spaced 12" o.c. For tying fabric to rails and braces, 'use 9 ga. wire ties spaced 24" o.c. For tying fabric to tension wire, use 11 ga. hog rings spaced 24" o.c. Finish of ties to match fabric finish. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. B. Concrete: The concrete mix shall be designed to provide a compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. 02444 3 N PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: Do not begin fence installation and erection before the _ final grading is completed, with finish elevations established. B. Setting Posts: Posts shall be set in galv. steel sleeves, minimum 10" long, cast into concrete slab. Set keeps, stops, sleeves and other accessories into concrete as required. Grout -in posts set into sleeved holes, with non -shrink portland cement grout or other acceptable grouting material. Allow concrete to attain at least 75% of its minimum 28-day compressive strength, but in no case sooner than 7-days after placement, before rails, tension wires, barbed wire, or fabric is installed. Do not stretch and tension fabric and wires, and do not hang gates until the concrete has attained its — full design strength. C. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through post caps or extension arms, bending to radius for curved runs. Provide expansion _ couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. D. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. E. Tension Wire: Install tension wires by weaving through the fabric and tying to each post with not less than 6 ga. galvanized wire, or by securing the wire to the fabric. F. Fabric: Leave approximately 2" between finish grade and bottom selvage, except where bottom of fabric extends into concrete. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released G. Repair damaged coatings in the shop or during field erection by recoating with manufacturer's recommended repair compound, applied per manufacturer's directions. H. Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4" o.c., and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15" o.c. J. Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground -set items in- concrete for anchorage, as recommended by the fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. K. Tie Wires: Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to — which attached clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. L. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. End of Section 02444 - 4 tfg� I r SECTION 02500 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVhNG PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide subgrade preparation, flexible base, prime asphaltic concrete pavement, emulsion sealer, soil pavement marking and all equipment and appliances perform the work shown on the Drawings. coat, hot -mix sterilization, required to 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Excavating, Filling and Grading - Section 02200 Concrete Work - Section 03300 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Reference Standards: Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, "1982 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges" (SDHPT). All reference to measurements and payments in SDHPT are deleted. All materials and work shall be included in the lump sum bid. No separate measurement or payment will be made for asphaltic pavement. B. The following tests will be paid out of the allowance specified in the Allowances, Section 01020. If such testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure. 1. Sieve analysis to determine grading: Plasticity index, liquid limit and linear shrinkage shall be determined on the material passing the 40 mesh sieve. Three (3) sets of tests will be required from each source and additional tests will be made on the material delivered to the job. 2. Standard Proctor Density tests shall be made of the subgrade materials and the flexible base. There shall be made a field test for each "land" or area worked. 3. Asphaltic Material: Standard tests shall be performed on all asphaltic material to prove that they conform to the specifications. One (1) set of tests shall be made of each day's deliveries from each source. A test certificate from a commercial testing laboratory stating that the material equals or exceeds the specifications may be furnished by the supplier. 4. Hot -Mix Asphaltic Concrete Material: One (1) laboratory density, extraction and stability test, as specified in SDHPT Bulletin C-14, shall be made of each day's production. 5. Subgrade Compaction: a. Laboratory moisture -density curve or curves as required, and results of at least 4 field density checks per lift are to be submitted to the Architect. 02500 - 1 F b. Compaction procedures are to be approved by the Architect or designated soils engineer. c. Samples of proposed select fill shall be furnished to the testing laboratory 7 days prior to installation to permit time for specification compliance inspection and approval. C. The coarse aggregate shall be that part of the aggregate retained on a No. 10 sieve. This material shall have an abrasion of not more than'40% loss by weight when subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test. Three (3) samples from each source shall be tested as specified. D. The fine aggregate shall be that part of the aggregate passing the No. 10 sieve. The plasticity index of that part of the fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve shall be not more than six (6) when tested by Test Method Tex-106E. Three (3) samples from each source shall be tested as specified. E. Surface Test: The surface of the pavement, after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established line, grade and cross section, and when tested with a 10-foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the paved area/roadway or tested by other equivalent and acceptable means, except as provided herein, the 'maximum deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, and any surface not meeting this requirement shall be corrected as directed by the Architect. F. Thickness Test: The testing laboratory shall examine the pavement at selected locations to determine if the specified total thickness of asphalt concrete has been placed.- If the average thickness is deficient by not more than 1/4", and no individual determination is deficient by more than 5/8" the pavement thickness shall be considered as meeting design requirements. If the average thickness is deficient by more than 1/4", or if individual thickness determination is deficient by more than 5/8", the pavement thickness does not meet design requirements. The deficient_ areas shall be defined, removed and replaced, or adjusted to design thickness by methods approved by the Architect. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Weather Limitations: 1. Prime coats shall not be applied when the air temperature is. below 60 deg. F. and is falling, but may be applied when the air temperature is above 50 deg. F. and is rising, the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Asphaltic material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Architect, are not suitable. 2. The asphaltic mixture, when placed with a spreading and finishing machine, shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 50 deg. F. and is falling, but it may be placed when the air temperature is above 40 deg. F. and is rising. The asphaltic mixture, when placed with a motor grader, shall not be placed when the air temperature, is below 60 deg. F. and is falling, but may be placed when the air temperature is above 50 deg. F. and is rising. The air temperature shall be taken in the shade away from artificial heat. Mat thicknesses of 1-1/2 inches and less shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is to be placed is below 50 deg. F. No 02500 - 2 F mixture with lightweight, coarse ;aggregate shall be placed when the temperature of the`i rface' on''which the mat is to be placed is below 50 deg. F. It is further provided that the asphaltic mixture shall be placed only when the humidity, general weather conditions and temperature and moisture condition of the base, in the opinion of the Architect, are suitable. B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including crown and cross -slope, for each course during construction operations. C. Traffic Control: Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic during paving operations, as required for other activities. Provide flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights for the movement of traffic and safety and to cause the least interruption of the work. D. Schedule of Work: This Contractor shall schedule new work so that it will not interfere with existing access drives and parking. All operations must be discussed with the Owner to insure a minimum of interference with continuing use of the facilities. E. Barricades: Erect barricades as required to control traffic and t L prevent damage or injury. Provide and maintain warning lights and signs as necessary. Keep warning lights burning from dusk to dawn. 1.06 GUARANTEE: Provide a guarantee of workmanship and materials for two (2) years beginning with the date of completion of paving work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBGRADE FILL: A. Specified in Section 02200. B. Subgrade fill shall meet the following requirements: Maximum Plasticity Index: 12 Minimum Plasticity Index: 3 No stones larger than 1-1/2" Free of clay, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable matter and other deleterious matter 2.02 FLEXIBLE BASE: A. Caliche, SDHPT Item 249, Type F, Grade 2, 6" thick after compaction. 2.03 HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT A.. SDHPT Item 340, Type "D", 1-1/2" thick after compaction. 2.04 PRIME COAT: SDHPT Item 300, MC-30, applied uniformly at the rate of 0.3 gallons per sq. yard. 2.05 EMULSION SEALER: 14% emulsion applied at an approximate rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gallons per sq. yard. Emulsion shall be Slow Setting Type, Grade SS-1 as described in SDHPT specifications Item No. 300.2 (6). 2.06 WATER: Clean, potable, free of organic matter. Contractor shall make arrangements for all water required for this work. 'IF, 02500 - 3 2.07 SOIL POISONING FOR WEED CONTROL: A. Use dry granular herbicide Monobor Chlorate manufactured by J. R. Simplot Co., P. 0. Box 198, Lathrop, CA 95330. 2.08 PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS: A. Material: - Non -bleeding pigmented vinyl acrylic copolymer latex, color yellow or as approved by Architect. B. Equipment: Equipment shall be a pressurized, self-contained paint machine capable of applying a straight line from 2" (two inches) to 6" (six inches)'wide, with consistent coverage of a minimum of 100 sq.ft. per gallon. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DRAINAGE: A. Complete drainage of the subgrade shall be provided at all times during construction On elevated grades, surface water shall be directed by proper grading of the subgrade to gutters, paved ditches or drains. Should underground water be present, sub -surface drains shall be provided of sufficient size and depth to collect and remove all ground water. - 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE: A. Excavate or fill, as required, and compact to a minimum depth of six _ inches (6") and at least twelve (12) inches outside limits of asphaltic concrete pavement where possible. Finish subgrade to the elevations and grades shown on Drawings. Notify Architect at once if there are any apparent insufficiencies of slope or possible low spots indicated on the drawings. Subgrade shall be brought to approximate optimum moisture content, bladed and rolled until the required density or degree of compaction has been attained. Special — care shall be exercised in grading intersection and parking areas where valley gutters occur, so that the profiles will conform with the typical sections and produce a smooth riding surface. Approximately forty feet (40`) back from the intersection of streets, the crown in the section shall be reduced gradually from 2- 1/2" to 1" at the beginning of the radii. B. Where it is necessary to fill, the material shall be placed in not _ more than six inch (6") layers, uniformly mixed and shaped 'to the typical cross-section. Each layer shall be compacted by means of blading and rolling. The proper moisture content shall be maintained during rolling. No successive layer of fill shall be placed until the apparent dry density of the material in place is at least 95% of the maximum density.. After all excavation and fill is completed, the subgrade shall be shaped to the grades and typical cross -sections, wetted and rolled to secure a smooth, firm foundation on whch to place the base. Fill material plasticity index shall not exceed 15. _ C. Compaction equipment shall be approved by the Architect prior to commencing work. Rollers may be either vibrating steel rollers or pneumatic tired type; in either case, minimum weightshallbe not less than 250 lbs. per inch width of roller contact. -` 02500 - 4 F D. Cohesive Subgrade: Shall becompacted to a minimum of 95% AASHO T 99 or ASTM Designation D698'density for the top six inches (6") and a minimum of 90% for all fill areas below the Cohesive soils whose optimum moisture is shall be compacted one or two percent (1% o r 3.03 FLEXIBLE BASE INSTALLATION: A. All subgrade shall be properly prepared and approved before hauling in the base material. The material shall be delivered in approved vehicles of a uniform capacity. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor that the required amount of base material is delivered to each station or area. B. Install flexible base course in accordance with SDHPT Item 249, "Construction Methods". C. The base course shall have uniform compaction of 95% Standard Proctor. All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop shall be corrected by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material as required, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. D. The base shall be finished to the grade and line shown on the plans for the finished pavement surface. 3.04 PRIME COAT INSTALLATION: A. Clean surface of foreign matter and apply prime coat uniformly to flexible base in accordance with SDHPT Item 310. Do not thin prime coat. Mask -off or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces, including concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks, from overspray during application of prime coat. 3.05 APPLICATION OF SOIL POISONING FOR WEED CONTROL: A. Apply soil poisoning to compacted base. Apply a minimum of four pounds of dry granular herbicide per one hundred (100) sq. ft. of area to be treated. After base has been treated with herbicide, spray the treated area with a minimum of two gallons of water per 100 square feet to incorporate the herbicide in the soil. 3.06 HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT INSTALLATION: A. Produce, place and compact the hot mix asphaltic concrete paving mixture in accordance with SDHPT Item 340, "Construction Methods". B. Transporting: The asphaltic mixture shall be hauled to the work in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign material. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be arranged so that all material delivered will be placed and all rolling shall be completed during daylight hours. C. Placing: The asphaltic mixture shall be dumped directly from the trucks into the spreading and finishing machine. When properly compacted, the finished course shall be smooth, of uniform depth and density, and shall conform with the typical sections shown on the Drawings and to the lines and grades established in the field. 02500 - 5 D. Compacting: The asphaltic mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with approved rollers. When directed by the Architect, the initial compaction shall be accomplished with the pneumatic tire roller. When rolling with the three wheel, tandem, or vibratory rollers, rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the pavement,, overlapping on successive trips by at least half the width of the rear wheel. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different in length. Rolling shall be continued until no further increase in density can be obtained ,and all roller marks are eliminated. All rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175 degrees F. E. In -Place Density: The in -place density shall be 96 percent of the maximum molded gyrated density as determined by 'Test Method Tex 126- E. The maximum molded gyrated density shall be determined from material sampled from the mixing plant. The field specimens utilized for the in -place density testing may be either cores or sections of asphalt pavement tested according to Test Method Tex 2074. 3.07 EMULSION SEALER INSTALLATION: A. Not less than one week nor more than -two weeks of completion of placing the hot -mix surface course on the streets and parking areas, the contractor shall clean the surface and apply sealer. The mixture shall be applied at approximately 90 deg. F. and any material heated above 140 deg. F. shall be discarded. No sealer shall be placed when the air temperature is below 50 deg. F. and falling. Mask -off or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces, including concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks, from,overspray during application of sealer. Do not allow traffic on sealed areas for a minimum of 48 hours after application of sealer. 3.08 APPLICATION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS: A. Locate markings as required by drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out all markings and handicapped symbols using guide lines, templates and forms. 1. Do not apply marking until emulsion sealer has cured for 10 days. — 2. Surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, sand, gravel, oil and other foreign materials. 3. Protective coating shall be allowed to cure -a minimum of 48 -- hours.prior to application of traffic paint. 4. Apply marking paint at rate of one gallon per 200 sq.ft. (equivalent to approximately one gallon for 500 lineal feet of 4" wide stripe). Unless otherwise shown parking striping shall be 4" wide. 5. Surfaces shall be dry. Application shall not be made when weather is foggy or rainy, or, ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40 degrees F., nor when such conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application. End of Section 02500 - 6 i n k, SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This section includes all materials, placing and finishing of all plain and reinforced concrete as indicated on the drawings. Form work, reinforcing, curing and related items are a part of this section. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, r' Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. �., 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: c Alternates - Section 01100 Excavating, Filling and Grading - Section 02200 r Asphalt Concrete Paving - Section 02500 1.04 CONCRETE TESTS: A. Make test cylinders from concrete as mixed, and at the direction of the Architect. A minimum of three (3) test cylinders shall be made for each major pour. B. Test specimen shall be taken by the Contractor and tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM C31-83 for "Compression Tests of Concrete". Results of tests shall immediately be submitted to the Architect. Cost of tests will be paid by the Owner - see Special Conditions - Section 01010. C. Where the ultimate 28 day compressive strength of concrete in any test cylinder falls below the strength specified for the class of concrete tested or below proportional minimum 7-day strengths, the proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to secure the required strength. If directed by the Architect, all concrete whose test specimen falls below the required compressive strength shall be removed from the structure. D. Substitution of materials shall not be made without additional tests for quality. All tests shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS: The current issue of ACI-301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" is a part 'of this specification and applicable to this project. Where any part of ACI-301 specification is modified or voided by this specification, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: Store cement on platforms off ground; protect stored cement against the elements. Handle and store aggregate separately in manner to prevent intrusion of foreign material. Protect all reinforcement until used. Use no frozen material or any hardened cement. 03300 - 1 1.07 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with 'Section 01340. Drawings shall show be diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing, and laps or rods, shapes, dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing and accessories. Shop drawings must be approved by the Architect before proceeding with work. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's product data. C. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. PART.2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM Spec. C150-76 or Air -Entraining Portland Cement C- 175, use Type III -A where high early strength concrete might be required, and Type I or I -A for all other concrete work. 2.02 COARSE- AGGREGATE: Hard, durable, uncoated, crushed stone or gravel conforming to ASTM Spec.-C33-74a. Maximum size aggregate allowed is 1/5 of narrowest dimension between forms of the concrete member or 3/4 of minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. For concrete having an exterior surface exposed, 95 to 100% shall pass a 1-1/2" sieve, 35 to 70% shall pass a 3/4" sieve, 10 to 36% shall pass a 3/8" sieve, and not more than 5% shall pass a No. 4 sieve. 2.03 FINE AGGREGATE: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains free from silt, loam, and clay, conforming to ASTM Spec. C33-74a. The fine aggregate when tested according to ASTM C136-83, shall have a gradation with 100% by weight passing 3/8" sieve; 95 to 100% passing No. 4 sieve; 80-to 100% passing No. 8 sieve; 50 to 85% passing No. 16 sieve; 25 to 60% passing No..30 sieve; 10 to 30% passing No. 50 sieve; 2 to 10% passing No. 100 sieve. The fineness modulus of fine aggregate shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1 Soundness of fine aggregate when tested according to ASTM C88-83, shall not have a loss greaterthan15% with magnesium sulfate solution test, nor more than 10% loss with sodium sulfate solution test. 2.04 MIXING WATER: Clean and free from oil, acid, and injurious ,amounts of vegetable matter, alkalies, and other salts. 2.05 REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be domestic and shall _ conform to ASTM A615-75 Grade 60, and shall have 60,000 lbs. per square inch minimum yield point, except that #3 bars, ties and stirrups may be Grade 40 with 40,000 lbs. per square inch minimum yield point. Deformation of deformed bars shall conform to Specification' for "Deformation of Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A615-75. If required, furnish certified mill test reports with each delivery, attesting that reinforcement meets.specification requirements. 2.06 POLYPROPYLENE FIBER ,CONCRETE REINFORCING: The concrete reinforcing fibers shall be polypropylene collated, fibrillated fibers from Fibermesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN, or an approved equal. The fibers shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendations as to type and amount. The fiber manufacturer or approved distributor shall provide the services of a qualified technician for a pre -job meeting and initial job set up. Only 03300 2 fibers designed and manufactured specifically for use in concrete from virgin polypropylene and so certified by the manufacturer shall be acceptable. Use in all sidewalks and floor slabs except as otherwise noted. 2.07 NON -SHRINK GROUT: Equal to master Builders Embeco Grout (pre -mixed). 2.08 METAL ACCESSORIES: Include all spacers, chairs, ties and other devices necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place. All metal accessories shall be zinc coated; for exposed work, support ends shall be turned upward. Material and work shall be in accordance with CRSI-72, except as modified by this specification or the drawings. r, 2.09 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER: Expansion joint filler shall be preformed saturated fiber filler, Celotex Flexcell, or approved equal. Joint material shall be full thickness of slab or joint, and unless otherwise indicated, 1/2" thick. F 2.10 ADMIXTURE: Chemical Admixtures, Pozzolanic Admixtures, ASTM C494-71 or C618-73, modified for loss of ignition not exceeding 6%. Admixture shall be used subject to certification based on tests and data. Submit certificates with related laboratory test reports attesting that admixture meets specified requirements and that admixture to be used for work under the contract is identical in composition and concentration with type used in test for acceptance. 2.11 FORMS: A. Smooth Finish: Use new 9/16" thick moisture -resistant plywood or line forms with 1/4" thick plywood. 2.12 AIR -ENTRAINING AGENT: Neutralized Vinsol Resin, or an approved substitute, conforming to ASTM C260-77. 2.13 SOIL POISONING FOR WEED CONTROL: A. Use dry granular herbicide Monobor chlorate manufactured by J. R. Simplot Co. 3.01 3000 PSI Concrete: All concrete designated 3000 psi shall have a compressive strength of 2400 psi in 7 days, and 3000 psi in 28 days. Use this mix for all concrete work required on this project. 3.02 3000 PSI AIR ENTRAINED CONCRETE: All concrete shall have a compressive strength of 2400 psi in 7 days, and 3000 psi in 28 days. Use this mix for sidewalks, and all other concrete slabs exposed to weather. Total air content required shall be 6%. 3.03 PROPORTIONS: A. Proportion mixed by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1-81. 03300 - 3 r B. Submit written reports to the Architect of each. proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. C. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192-69 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C39-72,, specified in ACI-301.72 (Rev. 1975). Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days,, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. D. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish. proportions as specified in ACI-301-72. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. Standard Deviation: If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI-214-77 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100, E. The proportions and mixes of aggregate to cement paste shall be designed by a recognized commercial laboratory from a representative sample of aggregate stockpiled at the site if job mixed; if ready - .mixed, shall be from a representative sample of aggregates stock- piled at the plant. If additional material is brought on the site for concrete work, a new design shall be made. The Contractor shall obtain a written approval from the Architect of the particular -- laboratory which he proposes to use. Cost 9_f M design mix for each strength will be paid for by the Owner out of the allowance specified in Section 01020. If additional material is brought to the stockpile, additional tests will be paid for by the Contractor. F. Workability of concrete shall be such that concrete can be handled, placed and worked into angles and corners of forms., around reinforcing steel and inserts without segregation,.without water and -- fine material rising to the surface. G. Slumps: Slumps. shall fall within the following limits: Footings Max. 3 --- Min. 1 _ Grade Beams, Walls Max. 5 -- Min. 2 Slabs and Beams Max. 4 --- Min. 2 03300 - 4 r 3.04 MEASURING: The method of measuring water and aggregates shall be such as to secure specified proportion in each batch and in manner that proportion of water to cement can be closely controlled and easily checked at any time. 3.05 MIXING CONCRETE: All concrete throughout shall be either job or plant mixed in an approved type of power operated mixer that will insure a uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. Contractors shall see that sufficient number of mixers are provided to rapidly carry on the work. Mixing shall. be done in accordance with the requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code. Mix each batch a minimum of one (1) minute before discharging. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE: A. Place no concrete until foundations, forms, reinforcing steel, pipes, conduits, sleeves, hanger, anchors, inserts, waterproofing, dampproofing, and/or other work required to be built into concrete has been installed, inspected, and approved by the Architect. Before pouring footings, see that bottoms of excavations are undisturbed earth with no loose earth under bearing surface. B. Place no concrete until earth surface to come in direct contact with the concrete has been sprinkled thoroughly with water. C. The placing or depositing of all concrete shall be in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code. 3.07 CONTROL JOINTS: The rate and method of placing concrete and arrangement of construction joints shall be such that concrete may be placed in one (1) continuous operation. Location of construction joints shall be as shown on drawings or as approved by the Architect. 3.08 REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Forms shall be removed in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code, without damage to concrete and in a manner to insure complete safety of the structure. Leave shoring in place until concrete member may safely support its weight and loads upon it. Generally, the following procedure will be required; 1. Wall forms may be removed after 72 hours. 2. Grade beam forms may be removed after 24 hours. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS: Construct forms to slopes, lines, and dimensions shown, plumb and straight and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage; securely brace and shore forms to prevent displacement and to safely support construction loads. Provide access openings to clean and inspect forms and reinforcing prior to depositing concrete. Do not coat forms with materials that will stain or cause injury to exposed concrete surfaces. Keep wood forms wet as necessary to prevent shrinkage. Forms for exposed concrete beams, girders, columns and pilasters shall provide for a one inch (1") chamfer on external corners. Construct forms for beams, girders and lintels so that sides may be removed without disturbing bottom of form or its support. See drawings for special architectural effects. 03300 - 5 3.10 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:' _ A. Place reinforcement accurately in position shown; securely fasten and support to prevent displacement before or during pouring. Cleaning, bending and placing of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute _ Building Code. 3.11 INSERTS AND FASTENING DEVICES FOR OTHER WORK: Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchor bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, grounds and other fastening devices required for attachment of other work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades, and secure in position before concrete is poured. Install sleeves for all piping passing through grade beams. Sleeve locations shall be approved by the Architect. - 3.12 CURING OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE: A. Curing of floor slabs is specified separately. B. After concrete structural members have taken the initial set (approximately l to 3 hours after placement), exposed surfaces shall be flooded with water or kept moist by sprinkling for a period of not less than 72 hours_- No curing_ compound shall be used on surfaces where finish requiring bonding is specified. -- 3.13 PATCHING: Directly after forms have been removed, all exposed tie wires and stapled ends shall be removed from concrete surface to be exposed; cut ties flush with finished surfaces of all other concrete. Rub smooth or cut off fins and rough places; remove all loose concrete and fill honeycombing surfaces, stone pockets, and other irregularities with cement mortar. Do not patch any surface until examination has been made by the Architect and permission given. 3.14 PROTECTION AND CURING: Protect concrete against frost and rapid drying, -- and keep moist for at least six (6) days after placing. Concrete from which forms are removed within six (6) days after pouring, and cement finishes shall be sprayed during -the curing period as frequently as drying conditions may require, and if necessary, be protected by suitable temporary coverings. Flood cement finishes with water as specified under Paragraph entitled "Cement Floor Finishes". 3.15 FLOOR SLABS: A. Concrete floor slabs on earth shall be placed over a well -tamped subgrade. Tamp and roll fill until thoroughly. compacted. Immediately place concrete of required thickness, and strike off at proper levels to receive finishes specified. B. Set continuous expansion joint strips where edge of slab abuts a vertical surface and elsewhere as shown; seal joint tightly around -- strips and spaces around pipes penetrating floors. Use coal -tar pitch or asphalt mastic for sealing joints. 3.16 CEMENT FLOOR FINISHES:' ^ A. Troweled Surfaces: This specification is for exposed slabs with or without integral coloring, sidewalks, and slabs to receive floor covering. 03300 - 6 tpi i 1. Slabs to receive floorCoverings shall be screeded a maximum of 8'-0" o.c., or as directed by the Architect. After placing, the z concrete shall be rodded and screeded to the proper elevations, then darbied or floated. As screeds are removed, the voids shall be filled and leveled; "Jitterbugs" or similar devices for bringing fines to the surface may be used prior to darby or F float work if used in a manner approved by the Architect. 2. As soon as possible the slabs shall be "laid down" by hand troweling the surface once over completely. At this time the surface shall be checked with a 10'-0" straight edge, and high or low spots shall be brought to a common level at the elevation shown. 3. As soon as the surface is capable of supporting a troweling machine, the slab shall be troweled again. Hand troweling will be approved for the second troweling. 4. As soon as the surface will "ring" under a steel trowel, a final hand troweling will be required. All machine marks must be removed, and the surface must be left smooth, level, and true. Irregularity in the surface grade exceeding 1/8" in 10' will not be accepted. 5. When the surface can be walked upon without damage, plug floor r, drains and flood entire surface with water. Provide a dam around the floor slab capable of containing a layer of water for for the entire curing period. Maintain a complete covering of water for 14 days. M NOT use chemical curing compounds. 6. Sidewalks shall be stiff brush or medium broom finish, in lieu of the third troweling. The texture shall be as approved by the Architect. Note Paragraph entitled "Concrete Walks" of this section of the specifications for further specifications regarding sidewalks. f 7. Ramps, porches and docks shall have stiff brush finish. 3.17 SEALING: 1 A. Concrete floors in base bid shall receive a two coat application of Sonothane Polyurethane concrete floor sealer. Prepare floor slab for application in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Omit this sealer if Alternate No. 1 is accepted. The amount and rate of application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.18 CONCRETE WALKS: A. Concrete walks shall be one -course construction, 4" in thickness of 3000 lbs. concrete as hereinbefore specified. B. Provide 1/2" expansion joints (with premolded filler) not more than 32' apart, also at junctions with curb, where walks abut building, platforms, and other fixed structures, and elsewhere as shown. Where walks terminate at curbs, provide 1" expansion joints with filler. Form dummy joints as indicated on drawings, or at 4'-0" intervals. C. Refer to Paragraph "Cement Floor Finishes" of this section for finishing instructions. Steps in connection with walks shall have the, same finish as walks. Round all edges, including those at expansion and dummy joints to 1/4" radius. Where walks terminate at ,.. curbs, finish walk 1/4" above curb. Permit no pedestrian traffic on walks for a period of three (3) days. Gross slope for sloped or crowned walks shall be 1/4" per foot, or as noted on the drawings. F d 03300 - 7 w .3.19 COLD WEATHER PROVISIONS: A. Place no concrete whenever it is anticipated that air temperature at the point of placement is likely to fall below 40 deg. F. B. Concrete -may be placed when air temperature is 40 deg. F. and — rising. C. Use of accelerators and anti -freeze compounds will not be approved. End of Section 03300 - 8 k SECTION 03600 - PRECAST POLYMER CONCRETE TRENCH DRAIN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide precast polymer concrete trench drain system, complete with end walls, outlets, and installation brackets. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Concrete - Section 03300 Waste Plumbing - Division 15 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturer of trench drain system shall show proof of at least 5 years of experience in fabricating precast polymer trench drain systems. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver, store, and handle trench drain components in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. 1.06 COORDINATION: Arrange for trench drain components to be set in place prior to pouring of concrete for floor slab. 1.07 GUARANTEE: Provide Owner a written guarantee which shall guarantee trench drain system to be free of defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of .Substantial Completion. The manufacturer shall repair and/or replace all defective components during this period at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TRENCH DRAIN: A. Provide precast polymer trench drain system equal to PolyDrain as manufactured by ABT, INC., Troutman, North Carolina, (800) 438-6057, (704) 528-9806. B. Drainage channels shall be composed of PolyDyn, a composite polymer concrete formulated from quartz aggregates, inert mineral fillers, and a high-grade polyester resin. C. Drainage channels shall be fabricated in nominal one (1) meter lengths, with a .6% slope built-in and interlocking joints to facilitate installation and prevent leakage. D. System shall be complete with closed end plates and outlets as required. E. All joints shall be sealed with PolySeal to assure a completely watertight drainage system. F. Installation shall be by means of PolySeat Installation Brackets, a pre -manufactured bracket designed to maintain the drainage channels in their proper configuration during the concrete pour. G. The compressive strength of the polymer concrete shall exceed 15,000 psi, and moisture absorption shall be not more than 0.2%. 03600 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine trench excavation to ensure a minimum of 4° of bedding concrete will be placed below and on all sides of drain channels. B. Ensure waste piping is in place and ready to receive drain channels. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Lay drain channels on ground along side.trench excavation to ensure channel segments are in the proper order for desired slope. B. Begin channel installation at outlet end of each run and progress upstream. C. Secure channels in PolySeat Brackets, and adjust to proper elevation. D. Interlock each channel into the previous channel with the built-in tongue and groove joints. E. Place plywood or other solid material across channel opening (between lips) to prevent -concrete from spilling into channel. F. Ensure that concrete is placed completely and solidly below and around the entire channel system,.- G. After concrete has cured sufficiently, seal all joints in channels with PolySeal. H. In the event that field cutting of channels is required, ensure that protective eyewear and respiratory equipment is worn. End of Section 03600 - 2 !ram f r^ SECTION 05400 - LIGHTGAGE STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide lightgage steel framing, including studs, bridging and accessories at exterior walls where shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Structural Steel - Section 05120 Miscellaneous Metal - Section 05500 Carpentry Section 06100 Insulation - Section 07210 Drywall Construction - Section 09250 Pre -Engineered Metal Building - Section 13121 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. 2. Indicate shop and field assembly details, including cuts and connections. 3. Indicate type and location of welds, bolts and fastening devices. • 4. Indicate location and type of each framing member. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating framing system components, including fasteners and accessories. C. Certification: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements and that installed assemblies meet design criteria. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Design Criteria: 1. Compute section properties in accordance with AISI Specification for Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Stud Walls: Design, fabricate and install framing system to withstand a 20 psf uniform windload, with a maximum deflection not exceeding L/240. B. Reference Standards: 1. AISI Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members, 1968, with Addenda Nos. l and 2. 2. AISI Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual, 1977. 3. AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1-75, including latest revisions. C. Welders: Qualified in accordance with AWS DI.l. 1.06 COORDINATION: Coordinate installation of metal framing system with brick and plaster trades. 05400 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTGAGE STEEL WALL FRAMING: A. Qualities: Wide flange, cold -formed steel studs, galvanized. 1. F(y): 33000 psi._ _ 2. Depth: 3-5/8 unless otherwise shown. 3. Gauge: 18 gauge, unless otherwise shown. B. -Standards: ASTM A446-76, Grade B. C. Source: Equivalent to Punched Cee Studs by Wheeling Corrugated Co. .or Inryco/Milcor "C Studs. 2.02 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Runner Tracks: Unpunched, deep leg track, material and size to match studs, galvanized. B. Bridging: 3/4" cold -rolled channels, 16 ga., black finish. C. Firestop at ceiling line: Fabricate from runner tracks to provide effective firestop. D. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard attachment and erection accessories. 2.03 BOLTS: ASTM A-307 or A-325. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Inspect structural elements for conditions that would prevent proper installation of framing system. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. , 3.02 FABRICATION: A. Lightgage structural framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. B. All framing components shall be cut squarely or at an angle to fit squarely against abutting members. Members shall be held firmly in position until properly fastened. Prefabricated panels shall be square and braced against racking. Attachments of similar components shall be done by welding, screw attachment, or bolting. Wire Tying of Framing, Components in Structural Applications Shall Not Be Permitted. ._ 3.03 STUD ERECTION: A. Erect framing plumb, level and square in strict accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. B. Securely anchor runners to structure. C. Space studs at spacing required by design criteria and stud heights (1611o.c. maximum). Provide minimum of 3 studs at corners of walls, 2 studs at openings in wall. D. Place studs in tracks, seated squarely, with stud web and flanges abutting track web. Securely weld flanges of studs to both tracks. E. Install bridging rows spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Weld 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 16-ga. clip angle to each stud at bridging locations; install continuous channels and weld to clip angles. F. Install required attachment devices. 05400 - 2 G. Install firestop at ceiling line. H. Hold members firmly in position until permanently attached. J. Welds shall be fillet, plug, butt or seam welds, sizes as recommended by framing manufacturer, performed in accordance with AWS DI.I. K. Field abrasions and welds shall be touched up in field after erection. End of Section 05400 - 3 SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide miscellaneous metal work as detailed, including anchors, fasteners, hardware and accessories. r 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Structural Steel, except loose miscellaneous items included in this Section - Section 05120 Rough Hardware - Section 06100 Finish Painting - Section 09900 1.04 QUALITY STANDARDS: A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except as otherwise shown and 'specified. f AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication,. and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", including "Commentary of the AISC Specification". , AISC "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". rAWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction." B. Regulatory Requirements: Finish hardware and operating controls, etc. shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate each item being furnished, including materials, quantities, sizes, shapes,locations, connections and fasteners. Designate shop and field welds in accordance with AWS standard symbols. Furnish setting diagrams, erection plans, templates and directions for installation of backing plates, embedded anchors and other items. B. Product Data: For each catalog item, submit manufacturer's product data sheet indicating product description and installation recommendations. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Properly identify and mark items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. B. Deliver embedded items to site in accordance with concrete construction schedule. C. Store products completely clear of ground and covered to avoid damage by elements. 05500 - 1 r 1.07 COORDINATION Coordinate with other trades where their work is affected by miscellaneous metal work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Miscellaneous Structural.Steel: ASTM A36. B. Castings: 1. Grey Iron: ASTM A48, Grade 35B. 2. Malleable: ASTM A47, Grade 35018. 3. Steel: ASTM A27, Grade 65 35. C. Fasteners Furnish galvanized with galvanized items. 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Expansion Bolts: Self -drilling anchors, Red Head Self -Drilling Series, or equal D. Shop Paint: Equal to TNEMEC Series 10-99 red metal primer. E. Galvanized Touch-up: Galvicon or ZRC compound. 2.02 FABRICATION - GENERAL: A. Fabricate work true to shape, size and tolerances, as detailed, with -- straight lines, square corners or smooth bends; free from twists. B. Grind and dress edges and ends of metal smooth, with no sharp edges and with corners slightly rounded. _ C. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 and approved Shop Drawings. Grind welds smooth and at decorative items, polish to uniform surface or radius. D. Construct connections and joints exposed to weather to exclude water. E. Provide sufficient type, quantity and size of anchors for proper fastening of items. Fastenings shall be concealed wherever possible. F. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades. G. Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installations. 2.03 FABRICATED PRODUCTS: A. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes, standard pipe, angles, plates, connections and bolts where shown and detailed on Drawings. B. Pipe Guardrails: 1. Where shown and herein specified, furnish and install pipe guardrail and accessories. All joints shall be welded and ground smooth. Provide weld type fittings where required. 2. Pipe guardrail shall be secured to concrete floors in 6" long pipe sleeves and set in sulfur, unless otherwise shown. 3. Provide slip type flanges with set screws at pipe sleeves. 05500 - 2 A f� F 4. Pipe guardrail shall be as shown on the Drawings and herein specified: Black Steel: 1-1/2" I.D. following acccessories: Brackets Slip Flanges Screw Flanges Terminal Caps Wall Returns black steel pipe complete with . 2.04 FINISHES: A. Standard Shop Paint: 1. Apply to miscellaneous ferrous metal items, except those indicated to be galvanized, or those with a factory primer. 2. Prepare surfaces by solvent cleaning and handtool cleaning. B. Galvanized Finish: Zinc coating, ASTM A123. 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Examine structure and surfaces for defects that would prevent proper installation of miscellaneous metal items. Report discrepancies. B. Field measure related work and openings as required for proper fit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb and level, anchored rigid and secure, and in true alignment with related and adjoining work. C. Field weld members in accordance with AWS D1.1. Grind exposed welds smooth. D. Provide anchoring devices and fasteners for properly installing items. E. Upon completion, re-examine work and correct to insure that installation is firm, tight, anchored, in true alignment with neat fits, without distortions, unsightly fastenings, raw edges or protrusions. F. Touch-up field welded areas with specified shop paint. Use specified galvanized touch-up at galvanized items. G. Guardrail: The structural strength of installed guardrail, fasteners, and mounting devices, as finally installed, shall be capable of withstanding a thrust of 250 lbs. applied in any direction. End of Section 05500 - 3 7 SECTION 06100 - CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Covers lumberyard items including wood blocking, grounds and nailers, wood treatment, and fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Lightgage Steel Framing — Section 05400 Gypsum Drywall Construction Section 09250 Sanitary Ceiling Grid - Section 09500 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Lumber Standard: For each use, provide lumber complying with r Product Standard PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard". Nominal sizes are indicated; provide actual sizes complying with minimum size requirements of PS 20 for moisture content specified for each .. use. B. Plywood Standard: For each use specified under this section, provide plywood complying with Product Standard PS 1 "Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial". C. Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has-been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. Certificate of inspection and grading by a recognized grading agency, approved by American Lumber Standards Committee, may be !, submitted with each shipment, in lieu of factory -marking, at Contractor's option. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. A. Wood Treatment Data, Carpentry, General: For information only, submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. B. Pressure Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained and conformance with applicable standards. Treatment required only where noted on the plans. C. For water -borne preservatives, include,statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to a maximum of 15% prior to shipment to project site. 06100 - 1 r- r 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provisions for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials against weather. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying ,- other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by carpentry work, and to comply with protection and storage requirements. B. Advise Contractor of heating or cooling requirements for installation areas, and for maintaining required ambient conditions during and after installation. C. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design -- requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER: A. General: Where wood framing from 2" through 4" in nominal thickness is indicated, provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of 'Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). B. Dress dimension lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide kiln -dried dimension lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of.dressing and complying with KD size requirements of PS 20. Mark lumber "KD" D. Blocking, Grounds and Naileis: Yellow Pine, No. 1 Grade, Kiln Dried. 2.02 PLYWOOD: A. Exterior: 1. Not Exposed: APA, EXT, B-C, Group 1. B. Interior: 1. Not Exposed: APA, INT, B-D, Group 1. 2.03 WALL SHEATHING: A. Use gypsum sheathing complying with ASTM C-79, 1/2" thick, 2' wide x 8' long with "V" shaped tongued and grooved.long edges and square short edges. r` B. Tape: Foil backed tape 1-1/2" to 2" wide applied to joints for vapor seal. 2.04 PARTICLEBOARD: A. Particleboard .shall be not less than 45 lbs./cu. ft. density, premium industrial grade 1-C-2 conforming to CS-236-66. 2.05 ANCHORAGE AND FASTENING MATERIALS: A. Select proper type, size, material and finish for each application. Comply with the following: 1. Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 2. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111. 06100 - 2 4 3. Bolts and Studs: FS FF-B-575. 4. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 5. Washers: FS FF-W-92. 6. Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561. PM 7. Masonry Anchoring Devices: For expansion shields, nails and drive screws, comply with FS FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588. 9. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A 575 carbon steel bars. 2.06 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT: A. Vacuum Treatment: Treatment shall be in accordance with the Vacuum Wood Preservers Institute (VWPI) standards and shall conform to is Federal Specification TT-W-572. The treatment shall be with a water repellent preservative containing 5% by weight of pentachlorophenol, r with a 2 lb. retention per cu. ft. using the Dri-Vac process of !: controlled vacuum. Use this treatment for all wood in connection with roofs and elsewhere wood treatment is called for on the Drawings. B. Retreat, regardless of type of preservative or method of treatment, all surfaces exposed by sawing, planing, boring or cutting with a liberal brush application or by immersing in the preservative r» initially used. 2.07 FRP PANELS: A. Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic panels complete with all trim and anchorage devices required for wall covering where indicated on the Drawings. Panels shall be equal to Kemlite Glasbord-P with Surfaseal, .09" thick, with embossed texture, and with the following properties: 1. Weight: 0.7 lbs/sf 2. Flame Spread: Class C (minimum) 3. Smoke developed: under 450 (ASTM E-84) 4. Hardness: 50 (barcol) 5. Impact strength: 15 in/lb (gardner) 6. Abrasion resistance: .038% 7. Water absorption: .16% (24 hrs. @ 77 deg. F) Finish color shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 - FABRICATION AND ERECTION 3.01 ANCHORS: A. Anchors shall be installed where specified or shown on the Drawings to anchor carpentry to masonry or concrete. 3.02 MOISTURE SEAL: A. A moisture seal or barrier shall be placed under or around wood members which bear on or are embedded in concrete or masonry. Seal shall be asphalt mastic, or an approved type. t 06100 - 3 3.03 ROUGH HARDWARE: A. Provide and install all rough hardware and metal fastenings as shown on Drawings, specified herein, or required for proper installation of carpentry. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts and similar items shall be of sizes.and types to rigidly secure member in place. See following headings for specific sizes and types of rough hardware required. 3.44 WOOD BLOCKING, GROUNDS AND NAILERS: A. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops, etc. Install true to line, level, plumb, and well secured in place. Wood blocking or nailers on drywall metal framing systems shall be anchored in place with screws. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD: A. Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA), for the installation of plywood. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING: A. Install 2' x 8' panels horizontally with grooved edge down, with end joints staggered over supports. At metal studs, screw attach to each. stud with recommended screws spaced 3/8" from ends and edges and at approximately 8" o.c. Tape all joints with foil backed tape. 3 A7 INSTALLATION OF FRP PANELS: Panels shall be installed with adhesive and nylon drive rivets as recommended and furnished with vinyl trim, including. divider strips, inside corners, outside corners, and base molding. All panels shall be set in trim with sealant as recommended by the panel manufacturer. Sealant shall be applied _along top edge of panels (no trim required). End of Section 06100 - 4 P- SECTION 07150 - DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Furnish all equipment and material to complete the Dampproofing. Furnish all supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Concrete - Section 03300 1.04 SCHEDULE OF WORK: The extent of each type of dampproofing work is shown on the Drawing or herein specified. Location of various types shall be as follows: A. Floor Dampproofing: Include polyfilm vapor barrier below sand fill under all concrete floors on grade. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Provide only products of manufacturers with not less than 3 years of successful experience in supplying the principal materials for the required work. B. Application: Additionally, applicator shall show proof of at least 5 years of experience in successfully completing work of comparable size. C. Proceed with dampproofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work has been completed. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which dampproofing work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with dampproofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations, and will permit the materials to be applied in accordance with the recommendations. 1.07 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations by the manufacturer of dampproofing materials. Include published data for each material showing compliance with the requirements. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 07150 - 1 1.08 GUARANTEE: A. All work under this contract shall be performed by a reliable applicator. Upon completion of the work the installer shall furnish the Owner with a written warranty, cosigned by the General Contractor, stating that all materials and workmanship are guaranteed for a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance, and that all repairs necessary during the warranty period due to water damage will be made without expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR.DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS: A. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil polyethylene sheet, maximum widths, with a maximum water vapor permeability of 0.11 perms, ASTM D96, Procedure B. B. Tape:. Equal to No. 880-1A9 Glass reinforced as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Mfg. Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FLOOR DAMPPROOFING: A. Preparation Do not proceed until plumbing and electrical rough -ins are complete and subgrade compaction and fill is complete. B. Installation: Apply continuously directly over compacted earth fill and immediately below sand fill. Install with width of sheet parallel with direction of pour, joints lapped 6". Secure all seams with tape. C. Protection: Protect completed membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair all tears with tape. End of Section 07150 - 2 I SECTION 07210 --BUILDING INSULATION. I 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide thermal and sound attenuation insulation. t 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: .Lightgage Steel Framing - Section 05400 Gypsum Drywall Construction - Section 09250 Acoustical Ceilings Systems - Section 09500 Pre -fabricated Metal Building Insulation - Section 13121 Pipe and Duct Insulation - Division 15 - Mechanical 1.04 SCHEDULE OF WORK: The extent of each type of insulation is shown on the drawings or herein specified. Locations of various types shall be as r follows: A. Ceilings: 6" thick thermal insulation installed above all finish ceilings. B. Exterior Walls: See Pre -Engineered Metal Building - Section 13121. C. Interior Walls: 4" thick sound insulation installed in certain interior walls where shown on the Drawings. D. Pipe and Duct Insulation: Specified in Division 15. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit sample of insulation, complete technical data of insulation and installation instructions for Architect's approval, in accordance with Section 01340. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver to site in manufacturer's original packaging, clearly marked with brand name, type, R-value and fire hazard classification. (FHC) B. Store materials off ground and protect from damage by elements. 1.07 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate installation with masonry and drywall trades to prevent cutting and patching. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. 6" Thermal Ceiling/Attic Insulation: Thermal Insulation ASTM C665- 84, Type III, Class A, 6" nominal thickness (R-19) fiberglass batts, foil -faced one side, batt and vapor barrier assembly Fire Hazard Classification 25/50/50 (ASTM E84-81). B. 4" Sound Insulation: Sound Insulation ASTM C665-84, Type I, 4" nominal thickness (R-11) fiberglass batts, unfaced. C. Staples: Galvanized, flattened staples. D. Wire: 20 ga., galvanized wire. 07210 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Thermal Batt Insulation: 1. Install continuously where shown, with no gaps between adjacent Batts. Maintain minimum of 3/4" of unobstructed air space -- between reflective surface and wall materials. 2. Secure flanges of insulation to sides of framing space fasteners 8" o.c. or closer to hold flanges tightlyto framing members. 3. Secure insulation in place with wire where required to prevent displacement or sagging. 4. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduits and other obstructions; insulate smallareasbetween closely -spaced f framing members. 5. Install with vapor barrier facing inside of building. 6. Install ceiling insulation 6 thick and over, perpendicular to _ long dimension of ceiling panels. 7. Where water piping of any nature occurs in an attic space except between two (2) heated floors, extend insulation up and over such piping in a continuous blanket. All water piping shall be on the'heated side of the insulation. 8. Where there is insufficient space between the bottoms of ducts and finished ceilings, extend insulation up the side of the duct _ across the top, and down on opposite side. Secure insulation to vertical surfaces as required to keep in place. B. Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation: 1. Install wall insulation between studs and secure in place. Butt ends closely and fill all voids. Extend insulation full height of wall. a SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide sheet metal work and related accessories. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Wood curbs, nailers, blocking - Section 06100 Painting - Section 09900 Pre -Engineered Metal Building - Section 13121 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01340 2. Indicate joints, types and locations of fasteners, shapes, sizes, expansion joints, special conditions, and installation �. details. B. Samples: Submit two 12" x 12" samples of each sheet metal material. �- Show pattern, finish, color, and thickness. 1.05 GUARANTEE: r A. Provide Owner a written guarantee which shall guarantee sheet metal work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL: A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A361-76, treated to hold paint, galvanized, 1' gauge as specified below, equal to Armco Zinc -Grip Paint -Grip sheet metal. r, F 2.02 FASTENERS: A. Nails: Galvanized steel material, flathead, wire, barbed, slating type, FS FF-N-105B-Aug 77. B. Screws: Self -tapping sheet metal type, FS-FF-S-107C-Sep 70. C. Rivets: Cadmium plated material, type and size as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 2.03 RELATED MATERIAL: A. Solder: ASTM B32-76, alloy grade 58, 50% tin, 50% lead. B. Flux: Phosphoric acid type, manufacturer's standard. C. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. D. Bituminous Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153C-74, Type I. E. Asphaltic Coating Compound: FS TT-C-494B-85, Type II. F. Primer: Thin asphalt cutback, FS SS-A-701B-74, ASTM D41-78. 2.04 EXTERIOR LOUVERS: See Mechanical - Division 15 07600 - 1 2.05 FABRICATION: A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items from galvanized sheet steel. B. Flashings, Counterf lashings and Misc.: 26 ga. galv. sheet steel, formed as detailed, in minimum 10 ft. lengths. C. Valley Gutter: 22 ga. galv. sheet steel, formed as detailed in one continuous length.. Solder -lap joints l" and rivet. Install outlet thimble to fit downspouts: install expansion joints at 30 ft. o.c. maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION:` A. Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for sheet metal work. B. Verify that. reglets, nails, cants, and blocking to receive sheet metal are installed and free of concrete and soil. C. Do not start sheet metal work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. 2. Fabricate and install sheet metal items in accordance with Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 1979 edition by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Assoc. 3. Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15'-0" running length. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edges, to form a hem. 5. For non-moving seams provide soldered flat -lock seams, unless otherwise noted. B: Flashings, Counterflashings: Install in accordance with detail drawings. Where nailing is required, fasten at 6" o.c. Lap ends of sheets 3 C. Valley Gutter: Extend edge under roofing panels and wall panels and secure to substrate. Solder and rivet downspout thimbles, extend 2" into downspout. Provide end pieces and.miters as required. 3.03 CLEANING: Remove flux and residual acid immediately by neutralizing with ;baking soda and washing with.clean water. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap, and debris. r- i' SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide exterior sealants required to close joints which would allow moisture or air to enter between fixed materials and as otherwise indicated on the Drawings for exterior sealing. Seal exterior joints and interior side of exterior joints with sealant rather than caulking compound. B. All joints (interior and exterior) between dissimilar materials shall be sealed with sealant. C. Provide caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on Drawings for interior caulking. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Painting and Finishing - Section 09900 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit manufacturer's name and product proposed for use, and manufacturer's color charts for Architect's selections and approval. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B.. Samples and Test Reports: For materials other than those specified, furnish a unitsampleof each material proposed (include primer), accompanied by certified independent laboratory test reports showing that materials to be furnished have been tested and meet requirements of applicable contract documents and manufacturer's certification that no major formula change has taken place since date of test. Sample containers shall be labeled as to supplier, name of material, specification numbers, colors. Include letters or published recommendations by manufacturer to support selection and compatibility of various related materials with respect to type of joints for which each material is intended. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Acceptable Sealants: 1. Dow Corning 795 2. General Electric Silpruf 3. Tremco Spectrem 2 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by manufacturer. Store in a manner to protect materials from Weather. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Sealant shall be applied only when (1) the ambient temperature is 40 degrees F and rising and (2) surfaces to be sealed are dry. 07900 - 1 2. Proceed with sealant work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protection: 1. Restore to original condition or replace work. or materials damaged during handling of sealant materials. 2. Protect surfaces adjacent to sealant work prior to starting work. .1.08 GUARANTEE: Provide Owner a written guarantee which shall guarantee sealant operations to be free of leaks and defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of acceptance., PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Sealant: (All Exterior Joints and Interior Joints Subject to Movement ,and between dissimilar materials.) Select from the following and use same manufacturer on the entire project: 1. Dow Corning 795 2. General Electric Silpruf 3. Tremco Spectrem 2 4. Color shall be as selected by Architect. B. Caulking Compound: One part acrylic latex caulk for general purpose interior caulking capable of being painted with latex or oil base — paints. C. Joint Backing: Closed cell or open cell polyethylene joint backing material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.. Select a size that will cause about 30% compression in joint. D. Bond -Preventive Materials: Polyethylene tape, pressure -sensitive adhesive or masking tape, FS UU-T-106. E. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each type of working surface. 2.02 MIXING: Mix two -component sealants in accordance with directions printed on container labels: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be smooth,. dry, sound. Brush and wipe surfaces dust free. Remove oil, grease, release agents, coatings or other contaminants from surfaces. B. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. C. Report unsatisfactory surfaces to Architect. D. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's written recommendations. r` 3.02 JOINT SIZES AND BACKING: A. Sealant: Minimum and maximum joint sizes shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown on drawings. Use joint backing material to control depth of joints. In joints 1/2" and wider, depth equal to 1/2 width with minimum depth of 1/4". B. Caulking: Depth equal to 3 times joint width. t,. 3.03 APPLICATION: A. Joint Backer: Install joint backer to achieve required depth of joints. Where not used, install a bond -preventive material in joint. B. Sealant: Apply sealant to joints prior to water repellent or clear coating operations. Apply sealant within 8 hours after primer has dried. Gun -apply sealant, completely filling joint. Tool joints smooth and wrinkle free. C. Caulking: Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to. adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bead, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. 3.04 CLEANING: Remove excess sealant and caulking materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses. Solvent recommended by manufacturer may be used to remove sealant. Remove debris from site. End of Section 07900 - 3 f SECTION 08100 - CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide custom hollow metal doors and door frames. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Finish Hardware - Section 08700 Field Painting - Section 09900 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: Manufacturer and supplier of hollow metal doors and frames shall show proof of at least 5 years of experience in fabricating custom hollow metal work. Manufacturer is subject to Architect's approval and, if requested, shall submit a list of recent local representative projects completed. B. Regulatory Requirements: Frame preparation, hardware mounting heights, etc. shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate each type of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames. Also indicate field splice joints, hardware locations and reinforcement, and other misc. items. B. Samples: Submit following samples if requested: 1. 12" x 12" section of door showing internal construction, edge detail, and butt reinforcement. 2. 12" x 12" "L" section of frame showing corner detail. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent damage and deterioration. Provide individual cardboard containers for doors. Store doors and frames upright in a protected dry area. 2.01 BASIC MATERIAL: A. Sheet steel for frames: Cold rolled commercial quality carbon steel, ASTM A366. Sheet steel for doors: Cold roiled stretcher leveled sheet steel, ASTM A366. B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525 G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 08100 - 1 2.02 FRAMES: A. Combination type with integral stop and trim, fabricated to profiles and shapes detailed with 16 ga, steel for interior frames, 14 ga. steel for exterior frames and interior frame for doors exceeding 36 width. Use galvanized steel for all hollow metal work. B. Corners and connections mitered and welded with exposed welds ground flush and smooth. Frame throat shall be full welded. C. Ensure that all hollow metal surfaces are fully galvanized after all welding, grinding, etc., has been 'executed. D. Provide 16 ga. jamb anchors at 2'-5" o.c. (min. 3 per jamb except 4 per jamb at drywall partitions) suitable for fastening to adjacent construction. Provide adjustable 14 ga. sill anchor at bottom of each jamb for fastening to floor.Provide removable steel spreaders at bottom. Provide mullion anchors where required. E. Machine, mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames for attachment of finish hardware. Reinforcing shall be not less than the following: Hinge and pivot reinforcements ----------- 7 gage, 1-1/4" x 10" minimum size Strike reinforcements -------------------- 12 gage Flush bolt reinforcements ------------ -- 12 gage Closer reinforcements ------------- --- 12 gage Reinforcements for: Surface -mounted hardware --- - --- 12 gage Hold -open arms ---------------------- 12 gage Surface panic devices --------------- 12 gage Provide for 3 rubber silencers at each strike jamb on single interior doors, and provide for 2 at heads of pairs of interior doors. 2.03 DOORS: A. Face sheets shall be of 16 gauge galvanized steel on exterior doors, 18 ga. galvanized steel on interior doors, with no visible joints or seams. B. Provide internal stiffeners of 20 gauge steel, spaced at 6" o.c. and welded to face sheets at 5" o.c. Fill space between stiffeners with sound deadening material, minimum 3 lb. density for interior doors and thermal insulation for exterior doors. Minimum R-value for exterior doors shall be R=4.0. C. Provide continuous 18 gauge channel reinforcement spot welded around perimeter of door. Close tops of exterior doors. D. Door edges shall be fully welded, ground smooth, with no visible seams on faces or edges. E. Doors shall have flush tops and inverted bottom channel. F. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors for attachment of finish hardware. Reinforcement shall be not less than the following: Hinge and pivot reinforcements - - -- -- .-------------- 7 gage Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or surface -mounted closers =------- 12 gage 2.04 LABELED FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES: A. Doors and frames designated to be labeled shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) label for class and hour rating scheduled. 08100 - 2 ,.. a, S 2.05 FINISH: Remove oil,.dirt,,and grease from exposed surfaces of doors and frames and apply a mineral filler to assure a smooth surface. Apply 1 shop coat of zinc chromate rust inhibitive primer, baked on. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES: A. Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions. Hold head level and maintain jambs plumb and square. B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. C. Leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb, and anchors are securely attached. D. Make field splices in accordance with Shop -Drawing details. E. Retreat all damaged surfaces of hollow metal with galvanized touch up material to ensure that entire hollow metal installation is completely protected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR METAL DOORS: Install doors with 1/8" clearance at head and jamb, 1/2" clearance at floors, and 1/4" clearance at thresholds, with no binding. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR DOORS: Install doors with 1/8" clearance at head, 3/16" clearance at jambs, and 1/4" clearance at thresholds. 3.04 PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted ' or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air drying primer. r End of Section 08100 - 3 I' c SECTION 08300 - SPECIAL DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide double acting impact doors where indicated on the Drawings. Furnish supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: { Carpentry - Section 06100 Finish Hardware - Section 08700 .W 6 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: Finish hardware and operating controls, etc. shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for doors in accordance with Section 01340. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for doors in accordance with Section 01340. 1.06 GUARANTEE: Doors shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance against defects in material and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOUBLE ACTING IMPACT DOORS: A. Where shown on the Drawings, provide impact doors equal to Ultra- Lite model by RubbAir Door Division of Eckel Industries, Ayer, Massachusetts, (800) 966-7822, (508) 772-0480. . B. Doors shall be 1-3/4" thick with a unitized construction using ABS extrusion as a structural internal frame, bonded to door facings of abrasion resistant high impact ABS with full color impregnated finish. Facings shall not be secured to frame with fasteners or adhesives of any kind. All interior spaces of the door shall be filled with urethane foam. C. Provide corrosion resistant high strength alloy "Y" cam hinges and flexible air seals. D. Provide flush rectangular double glazed 1/8" polycarbonate window in each door, 14"w. x 16"h. E. Provide the following options: 1. Molded polyethylene bumpers. 2. Raised bearing and jamb guard. F. Finish color of doors shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 08300 - 1 I G. Where shown on the Drawings, provide dual access key locking swing bolt with cylinder on each side of door. Masterkey locks with balance of doors. Coordinate with door frame manufacturer for location of slot in frame to receive swing bolt. — PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Installer shall examine the substrates and conditions under which the door units are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. End of Section 08300 - 2 ^ I` SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE t PART 1 - GENERAL j,. 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Perform all work required to complete the Finish Hardware installation indicated by the Contract Documents. Furnish all supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: r` Hollow Metal Doors & Frames - Section 08100 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: OW A. Regulatory Requirements: Finish hardware, installation and mounting r heights, etc. shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). «� 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Schedules: Submit detailed finish hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01340, for Architect's approval. Schedule shall be complete, including type, manufacturer's name and number, and finish of each item required. A complete schedule of keying shall also be furnished. Do not order or deliver finish hardware until Architect has approved schedules. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data on each item of �- hardware, including maintenance and installation instructions. C. Samples: If requested by Architect, submit sample of each type of finish hardware item used on project. If approved, samples may be used on project. D. Templates: Furnish templates to other trades as required for fabrication of hollow metal door and frames, aluminum and glass doors, or other items related to hardware. - 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Package and deliver hardware items separately and mark each to correspond with numbers on hardware schedule. Include necessary instructions, templates, drawings and fasteners for proper installation. Include extra fasteners. B. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. C. Coordinate hardware with other work. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule. F 08700 - 1 w I 1 1.07 COORDINATION: A. Review approved Shop Drawings of related trades and verify that scheduled finish hardware is suitable for each related item of work. B. Deliver templates and finish hardware to aluminum and glass door suppliers for fitting and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Manufacturers Reference Numbers: Where items of hardware are specified by numbers of manufacturers, they are taken from the following catalogues: - Sargent Stanley Trimco Ives Trego Glynn Johnson Corporation And those noted B. Only items listed as equal will be accepted by the Architect. C. Hinges - Shall be Stanley/Hager - in type, size and weight listed in the hardware sets. Comparisons of either McKinney or Hager/Stanley will be accepted as equal. Item Specified 1r.. Allowable Equals te Mfr. item Mfr- Butts: FBB168 Stanley BB1168 Hager T4B3786 McKinney FBB179 Stanley BB1279 Hager TB2714 McKinney FBB212 Stanley BB759 Hager TB792 McKinney 2060 Stanley 1250 Hager 1502 McKinney D. Mortise Locks - Shall be 18-7700 OB design as manufactured by Sargent. Acceptable substitutes may be selected from the following: Russwin: Series 5000 W4 Ashford design Corbin: Series 9500 863 Global design E. Hand of Door: The drawings. show the swing hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as shown. F. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping _ sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. G. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, latest edition. H. Furnish stainless steel screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. 08700 - 2 r' J. Provide concealed fasteners' for, hardware units which are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard - manufacturer units of the type specified are available with r., concealed fasteners. iK. Elimination of Architectural Barriers: Door hardware shall comply with the applicable requirements of Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation, Elimination of Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes, and as follows: 1. Door Hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five lbf. Preferred designs include but are not limited to -� lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms, and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a t; textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface may be made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those to hazardous areas. r. 2. Door Closers: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position -of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three seconds to move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees. 1" 3. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling j open a door shall comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door �•. opener or 30 -inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull latch. Forces shall be as follows: a. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lbf. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 lbf is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials. b. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors " shall not require a force exceeding five lbf. 4. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force e'. allowed by the governing authority or applicable building code. 2.02 KEYING: A. All locks shall be master keyed as directed. B. Furnish 6 master keys direct to Owner. C. Exterior locks shall have construction cylinders, construction masterkeyed. Furnish ten (10) keys. Keys shall have key code stamped on bow of key. D. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock. 08700 - 3 E. Hardware supplier shall consult with Architect and Owner's Representative and secure written approval of the complete keying layout prior to placing lock order with factory. F. After installation of all hardware and before acceptance of the building, hardware supplier shall check each locked door against key code index to make certain that correct locks and cylinders are on. proper doors. On any incorrectly located cylinder, he shall tag and have general contractor relocate to proper position. G. Hardware Schedule: (See Attached). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Location for Builders' -Hardware" by BHMA, except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by the Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, re -install each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not -factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Use only stainless steel fasteners. 3.02 FINAL ADJUSTMENT: A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware during the final adjustment of hardware. 08700 - 4 r P" 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Furnish each door leaf with hardware items scheduled. If a door is shown on the Drawings and not included in hardware schedule then Contractor shall provide comparable hardware as `. doors at similar locations or functions, at no additional cost. Heading No. 1 Doors Marked 1, 2 Each to have: 3 Hinges FBB168 4.5 x 4.5 US32D Stanley 1 Exit Device 12-8813 ETL w/cylinder US32D (Door Mk 1) Sargent 1 Exit Device 12-8810 w/cylinder US32D (Door Mk 2) Sargent 1 Closer EN350-P9 Sargent 1 Kickplate 10" x 2" LDW 18 ga. SS Trimco 1 set Gasket 309AP Pemko 1 Threshold 270A Pemko 1 Stop 1201-5 ES Trimco 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco Heading No. 2 Doors Marked 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 Each to have: 2 Cylinders as required Sargent Balance of hardware by door manufacturer Heading No. 3 Door Marked 9 Each to have: 3 Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 US32D Stanley 1 Privacy Set 8165 LW1L US32D Sargent 1 Stop 1279 US26D Trimco 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco Heading No. 4 Door Marked 10 Each to have: 3 Hinges FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 US32D Stanley 1 Lockset 8105 LW1L w/cylinder US32D Sargent 1 Stop 1279 US26D Trimco 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco 08700 - 5 i. Heading No. 5 Door Marked 11 Each to have: 3 Hinges FBB168 4.5 x 4.5 Stanley 1 Lockset 8116 LW1L w/cylinder US32D Sargent 1 Closer EN350-P9 - Sargent 1 Kickplate 10" x 2" LDW 18 ga. SS Trimco 1 set Gasket 309 AP Pemko 1 Threshold 270A Pemko 1 Stop 1279 US26D Trimco 3 Silencers 1229A Trimco End of Section 08700 - 6 r SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide all gypsum drywall work and materials shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Lightgage Steel Framing - Section 05400 Steel Channel Door Frames - Section 05500 Carpentry - Section 06100 Building Insulation - Section 07210 Custom Hollow Metal Work - Section 08100 Acoustical Ceiling Systems -.Section 09500 Painting and Finishing - Section 09900 1.04 SCHEDULE OF WORK: See finish schedules and Drawings for locations of gypsum work required. The types of work include the following: A. Single Layer Applications: Partitions, 5/8" thick moisture '^ resistant (USG W/R Firecode "C"), Type X. B. Interior Drywall Framing and Furring: 20, 25 gauge metal stud system and furring channels. C. Exterior stud walls .and sheathing (see Lightgage Steel Framing - ? Section 05400 for studs). 1.05 COORDINATION: A. Build in openings and chases for heating, plumbing, and electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits built into drywall partitions and ceilings. B. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for their work to avoid cutting and patching: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., Flinkote Co., Republic Gypsum Co. B. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum of 3 years previous experience in comparable work. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Fire Hazard Classification; Local Building Code. D. Fire Endurance Ratings: 1. Exterior Wall: l hour fire -rated construction where shown on the Drawings, U.L. Design U425. E. Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/8" in 810" for plumb, level, warp and bow. 1.07 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's product data sheets and printed installation instructions for each product proposed for use, in accordance with Section 01340. t 09250 - 1 B. Samples: Submit samples of framing members and accessory items. C. Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Deliver fire -rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification numbers. Store materials under cover, in dry area, off floor. Damaged, deteriorated, or wet materials shall be rejected and replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Source: Products listed are items manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. and are -listed as a standard of quality. Equivalent items of listed acceptable manufacturers are acceptable. Products furnished on project shall be of a single manufacturer. B. Interior Partition - Metal Studs: USG metal studs, channel type, roll -formed from 25 ga. galvanized steel, designed for screw attachment - Use 20 ga. where noted. Metal studs and runners must comply ,with ASTM C645-81 specifications, including minimum thickness. C. Exterior Wall Metal Studs: Specified in Section 05400 - Lightgage Steel Framing. D. Floor and Ceiling Runners; USG metal runners formed of 25 ga. galvanized steel. E. C. R. Channels: 1-1/2" cold rolled steel channels, 16 ga., black asphaltum finish. F. Furring Channels: USG metal furring channel, 7/8" deep, roll formed, hat -shaped sections of 25 ga. galvanized steel. G. Gypsum Wallboards: 1. Water -Resistant Board: 5/8 thick Sheetrock W/R Firecode "C" Wallboard, ASTM C630-83, Type X. H. Gypsum Wall Sheathing: Specified in Section 06100. J. Thermal and Sound Attenuation Batts: Specified in Section 07210. K. Fasteners: Provide type and size as recommended by drywall manufacturer, length as required for each assembly. L., Drywall Adhesive: As recommended by drywall manufacturer for substrate scheduled. M. Wallboard W/R Sealant: Sheetrock W/R Sealant. N. Metal Accessories: -1. Corner Beads: Our -A -Bead No. 101, galvanized. 2. Metal Trim (Casing Bead): No. 200-A or 200-B metal trim, galvanized. 3. Control Joints: No. 093, galvanized. .P. Acoustical Sealant; Resilient, non -hardening, Tremco Acoustical Sealant and Acoustical Tape, by Tremco Mfg. Co., BA-98. Acoustical Sealant by.Pecora Chemical Corp., or USG Acoustical Sealant. 09250 - 2 k PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: Install all drywall materials in strict accordance with U. S. Gypsum's current "good design practice" recommendations and printed instructions, but not less than the requirements that follow. If a l { requirement of these specifications is in conflict with that of the drywall manufacturer's recommendations or fire resistive rating �- requirements, then the manufacturer's recommendations or fire resistive rating requirements shall govern (at no additional cost to the Owner). Contracter shall notify the Architect in writing of any such conflicts prior to installing the materials. 3.02 PREPARATION: Maintain.minimum of 55 deg. F. temperature in building one week prior to installation and until insulation and joint treatment is complete.. Provide adequate ventilation to remove excess moisture during t joint treatment. 3.03 METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION: A. Metal Runners: Align accurately according to partition layouts and fasten to structure at 24" o.c. Brace top runners to structure above with bracing members 8 ft. on center, maximum. B. Caulking: Before anchoring runners of partitions shown with sound insulation, apply 2 beads of 3/8" dia. acoustical sealant to contact surfaces of runner tracks and end studs to seal with adjoining structure. C. Metal Studs: Place in accordance with schedule below, unless otherwise noted on Drawings, into floor and ceiling runners. Secure studs to runners with screws at door and window frames, partition intersections and corners and secure remaining studs with positive attachment. Where required for additional height, splice studs by nesting a minimum lap of 18" and attach flanges together with 2 screws in each flange. 1. Interior Stud Spacing and Gage: 16" o.c., 25 ga. for heights up to 14 ft. 16" o.c., 20 ga. for heights over 14' but not more than 18' D. Chase Wall Studs: Position double row of studs vertically in runners so studs are opposite each other in pairs with flanges pointing in same direction. Space at 16" o.c. unless otherwise noted. Anchor each stud to runner flanges with screws. Cross brace between rows at quarter points in partition height, width 1" screws spaced 8" o.c. in each stud web. E. Door Frames: 1. Studs adjacent to door frames shall be securely screwed or bolted to jamb and head anchors clips. 2. At the frame jambs install two floor -to -ceiling height runners nested into a box form in addition to one STIO stud on each side of frame to act as strut -studs. Boxed steel runners shall be screw attached together using 1/2" type 5-12 screws @ 12" o.c. maximum. Attach STIO stud to boxed steel runners with S-12 screws @ 12" o.c. maximum. 09250 - 3 i ., 0 3. At the frame head, install steel runner for openings up to 3' 10"; boxed studs in addition to runner for openings up to 7'-10" maximum; and tubular structural girts for openings V -10" or more in width. Anchor runners to boxed studs to structural girts with S-12 screws wsame as noted above for jambs. Cut runner long enough to provide minimum 2" end flanges for attachment to strut -studs at jambs. Fasten runner to strut - studs with at least four 1/2" type S-12 LPH screws per flange. F. Girts: Provide stud material placed horizontal in the wall at mid height of the partition or not to exceed 5' on center vertical. Girts shall be cut between and securely fastened with sheet metal screws to studs. Additional girts shall be placed at or within 12" of ceiling line in.all partitions extending above ceiling. Girt at ceiling shall be full width of studs to provide effective fire stop, at the Contractor's option he may substitute 1-1/2" coldrolled plaster -channel passing thru openings in studs at girt location other than ceiling line. Cold rolled channels shall be securely attached to each stud. G. Exterior Wall Metal Stud Framing: Specified in Section 05400 Lightgage Steel Framing. 3.04 PANEL ERECTION: A. General: 1. ` Stud Partitions: Do not begin installation of wallboard until stud framing has been inspected and approved by Architect. 2. Concealed Mechanical and Electrical Systems All mechanical and electrical work that will ,be concealed by installation of wallboard shall be inspected and approved by Architect prior to installing wallboard. B. Batt Insulation: Where designated, install batt insulation continuously in stud cavities. Insulation is specified in Section 07210. C. Single -Layer Wallboard Treated Joints: Use maximum practical lengths. Apply face out with long dimension vertical. Place abutting ends and edges over stud flanges. Joints on opposite sides of a partition shall occur on different studs. Make cutouts within field of panels in a workmanlike manner. Treat cut edges, utility holes and joints between wallboard, including angle intersections, with W/R Sealant prior to-application.Attach with screws spaced 12" o.c. in field of board and 8"-o.c. staggered along vertical abutting edges. -Neatly fit and stagger end joints. Do not apply wallboard on both faces until after stud cavities have been insulated. D. Acoustical Caulking:" In partitions receiving sound insulation, caulk perimeter of face layer and openings. 1. Caulking Face Layer: Caulk perimeter of face layer by running a continuous 3/8 x 3/8" bed of acoustical sealant against adjacent surfaces and runner track before applying face layer. 2. Caulking Cut -Outs: Seal sides and backs of electrical boxes by buttering with acoustical sealant during time of partition framing and prior to erection of wallboard. Seal joints between box and cut-out in wallboard with acoustical sealant. 09250 - 4 r r� 3.05 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION: I A. Corner Beads: Install on external corners, with suitable fasteners ` spaced 9" o.c. on both sides. B. Metal Trim: Install over face -layer wallboard with suitable fasteners spaced 9" o.c., where gypsum board surfaces meet 4 dissimilar surfaces, where interior partitions intersect exterior walls, and elsewhere as shown on Drawings. j^ C. Control Joints: Unless otherwise shown, install above door frame jambs, borrowed light frame jambs, at changes in back-up material, in partitions at 30' o.c., in ceilings at 50' o.c. in both directions, in wings where "L", "U" and "T"-shaped ceiling areas are joined, at locations where expansion or control joints occur in the I 1 base wall and elsewhere as recommended by the drywall manufacturer. Attach to face layer wallboard with 9/16" "G" staples spaced 6" o.c. r in each flange. 1, 3.06 CLEANING: At the completion of installation, remove rubbish from building, leaving floors broom clean. Remove excess material, scaffolding, tools, and other equipment from building and job site. End of Section 09250 - 5 r F SECTION 09500 -ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide lay -in type suspended acoustical ceilings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: FRP Panels - Section 06100 Building Insulation - Section 07210 A/C Diffusers and Grilles - Division 15 - Mechanical Light Fixtures - Division 16 - Electrical r 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate materials and construction of systems and locate suspension grid members and show their relationship with walls, partitions, furr downs, light fixtures, grilles, and diffusers. Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of acoustical system component. Include details of light fixture and duct penetrations at ceilings required to have fire endurance ratings. B. Samples: Submit full size samples of each acoustical board and suspension system for Architect's approval. - C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for . cleaning each type of acoustic material. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications of Installer: Subcontract the acoustical ceiling and related work to an experienced installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustical materials, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. B. Fire Hazard Classification: 1. Maximum Flame Spread: UL (ASTM E84): 25, Class 25 FS SS-S- �'" 118A (13 Jun 80). i 1.06 COORDINATION: Coordinate installation with other trades and make provisions for their work to prevent cutting and patching. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in factory packages with factory labels attached indicating brand, pattern, size and fire rating as applicable. Store acoustical materials at normal room temperature in a protected enclosure having a stabilized moisture content. Comply with manufacturer's storage recommendations. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. Furnish written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance. 09500 - 1 L B. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, sagging, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting or loss of acoustical properties of materials. 1.09 EXTRA STOCK: At completion of project, furnish Owner with one full unopened carton of each type of acoustical board material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Acoustical Ceiling Board Type I: Plastic encapsulated fiberglass acoustical board, Class "A", ASTM E84_5/0/15, equal to MBI San Pan as manufactured by Metal Building Products Co., Cleveland, Ohio, (216) 431-6400 (call collect). - — Sound Transmission Class: 41, ASTM E90 . Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.85 or more, ASTM C423-84a & E795 Light Reflectance: .80 or more, ASTM C523-68 — Size: 24" x 48" x 1", Lay -in, Square edge Board Finish: Standard white polyvinyl fluoride plastic film Suspension System: Exposed pultruded reinforced fiberglass — plastid Suspension System Finish: Low gloss white Structural Properties: Lay -in. panels shall be capable of supporting 3/4 lb./sq.ft. of batt insulation with no visible sagging of panels B. Exposed Lay -In Suspension System: 1. Exposed tee grid system, light -duty classification in accordance with ASTM C635., equal to Sanigrid as manufactured by Kemlite Company, Joliet, Illinois, (800) 435-0080, (815) 727-5000. 2. Main and cross tees fabricated of 3/32" pultruded reinforced fiberglass plastic, 1" exposed flange. Main tees 1-1/4" high, 48 inch cross tees 1-1/4. 3. Wall angle, 1-1/4 high x 3/32" angle shaped, 3/4" exposed flange, finish to match grid. - — 4 Hold down clips as supplied by suspension system manufacturer. 5. Junction clips shall be used at all grid -to -grid connections. C. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12 ga., galvanized, soft -annealed, mild steel Wire. — D. Attachment Devices: Where hanger wires cannot be directly wire -tied to framing members, provide attachment devices designed for type of construction used in the work, with a carrying capacity not less than 5 times design loads involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. In areas to receive acoustical materials, maintain relative humidity at not more than 70% and temperature between 60 deg. F. - 75 deg. F., 24 hours before, during, and after installation. B. Examine areas for conditions that would affect quality and execution _ of work and report discrepancies. 09500 - 2 jj r 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636. B. Minimum width of border tile of board allowed: one-half unit width. f 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM: l A. Space main tees at 48" o.c., unless otherwise noted, suspend from structure with hanger wire spaced at 48" o.c. Install additional �^ hanger wires at 6" from ends of each suspension member and at corners of light fixtures, and other items supported by ceiling suspension system. Use connector clips at all joints in main �., runners. B. Space cross tees at 24" o.c., connect to main tees. Rest main and cross tees on wall angles. C. Rigidly brace entire system in both directions, leave bottom surface of members flush and level. D. Install junction clips at all intersections of grid members. E. Do not install ceiling boards until all mechanical and electrical systems in attic have been inspected by Architect. Install ceiling board according to manufacturer's recommendations and in level plane bearing on suspension members. Neatly cut out board around items installed by other trades. After all attic insulation is completed, r" leave one grid space per room open for attic inspection. Install the in open grid space when approved by Architect. F. Provide hold down clips for each board in system in vestibules and within 10 feet in all directions of exterior doors and elsewhere as noted. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling board that is damaged, installed improperly, or shows visible sign of sagging. Clean soiled areas of ceiling material and exposed suspension system; comply with manufacturer's instruction. Replace ceiling units and members which are damaged or cannot be cleaned. 3.05 PROTECTION: Advise Contractor of proper procedures for protection of acoustical ceilings from damage or deterioration. r! End of Section 09500 - 3 r r SECTION 09700 - POLYMER FLOOR COATING i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide polymer floor coating where shown on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: f Alternates - Section 01100 Concrete - Section 03300 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM C-579 2 ASTM C-307 3. ASTM D-790 4. ASTM D-2240/Shore D. Durometer 5. ACI Committee #403/PP. 1139-1141 6. MIL-D-3134F 7. ASTM D-1044 8. ASTM D-2047 9. ASTM E-831 10. ASTM C-413 11. ASTM D-648 B. Contractor Qualification: Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in the manufacturing and installation of polymer floor finish systems for the past ten years. Contractor shall have completed at least five projects of similar size and complexity. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials in unbroken, factory -marked containers and store in dry, protected area. B. Maintain storage temperature between 60 deg. and 90 deg. F. 1.06 GUARANTEE: Contractor shall furnish a single written warranty against defective materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) full year from date of acceptance. r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Provide polymer floor coating system with all necessary materials equal to STONCLAD PT manufactured by Stonhard, 2901 Technology Drive, Suite 101, Plano, Texas 75074, (214) 424-2525. B. Components: 1. Penetrating, moisture tolerant, two -component epoxy primer. 2. High performance, three-part mortar of epoxy resin, curing agent, and selected graded aggregates blended with inorganic pigments. 09700 - 1 r 3. Epoxy top coating equal to, STONKOTE GS4 high solids, general service clear epoxy coating with. non-skid surface over basic polymer floor coating. C. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Completed floor coating system shall have the. following physical/ chemical characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength 9,1000 psi after 7 days 2. Tensile Strength - 1,700 psi 3. Flexural Strength g,000 psi 4. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity 2.24 x 10 psi 5. Hardness 85-90 6. Bond Strength 400 psi (100% concrete failure) 7. Indentation No Indentation 8. Abrasion Resistance 0.2 gm max. weight loss 9. Coefficient of Friction 0.6 10. Flammability Self Extinguishing. Extent of 11. Linear Expansion 12. Water Absorption 13. Heat Resistance Limitation 14. Heat Deflection Temperature 15. Cure Rate (at 77 deg. F/ 25 deg. C) allow burning 0.?5 inches max. 3.5 x 10- in/in - c 0.2% 140 deg. F/60 deg. C (for continuous exposure) 200 deg. F/90 deg. C (for intermittent spills) 110 deg. F/43 deg. C 6 hours for foot traffic 18 hours for light traffic 24 hours for normal operations PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas to receive polymer coating for defects in existing work that affect proper execution of polymer coating work and deviations beyond allowable tolerances for the concrete slab work. B. Start work only when all defects are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Concrete substrate _shall have cured 30 days utilizing a curing membrane. Concrete subfloors on or below grade shall be adequately waterproofed beneath and at the perimeter of the slab. Concrete shall have a light steel trowel finish. B. Heat (air temperature between 60 deg. and 90 deg. F/16 deg. and 32 deg. C).to be supplied by General Contractor. C. Job area to be free of other trades during, and for a period of 24 hours, after floor installation. D. Protection of finished floor from damage by subsequent trades shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. E. Concrete preparation shall be mechanical means and include use of scabbier, scarifier or shot.blast machine for surface removal. F. Properly prepared substrates shall be primed using appropriate manufacturer's penetrating primers with strict adherence to installation instructions. 09700 - 2 G. j. Designated areas shall be waterproofed using manufacturer's sealant/membrane system with strict adherence to installation instructions. r� 'I 3.03 INSTALLATION: ' A. Floor installation shall strictly adhere to manufacturer's written instructions and directions. B. Garbage and debris shall be properly disposed of and arrangements lj shall be made to remove unused material from the job site. C. Chasing - areas where the installed floor does not abut against a r vertical surface shall be chased. The chase shall be 1/2-3/4-inch/ (' 13-19 mm wide chiseled to a straight, saw cut, 1/4-inch/6 mm depth. D. Expansion and Control Joints - where recommended by manufacturer, a joint shall be saw -cut after floor installation and filled with manufacturer's flexible epoxy or urethane sealant. E. Coating - STONKOTE GS4 with non-skid texture. Texture application as determined by Architect. r i End of Section 09700 - 3 r^ SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND FINISHING ,. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide complete painting of surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, including mechanical and electrical equipment, unless otherwise noted not to be painted. B. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section. C. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, and lead coated copper shall not be painted or finished except as otherwise specified or scheduled. D. Other surfaces not to be painted, unless otherwise noted, include prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings; items with factory applied final finish; chases; and plenums above suspended ceilings, except as noted otherwise. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Caulking and Sealants - Section 07900 Gypsum Drywall Construction - Section 09250 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. B. Field Quality Control: Apply each type of finish required on a representative area or room for approval of color, texture, quality and workmanship. After approval, these applications shall serve as standard of quality for entire project. 1.05 SAMPLES AND COLORS: A. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by Architect. Number of colors to be used on job will be determined by Architect. B. Prepare two 12" x 12" samples of each color and sheen selected, on �. properly prepared paint -out cards or hardboard. Approved samples shall remain at project site. C. Submit 12" x 12" samples of drywall textures. D. Submit paint schedule in accordance with submittal requirements of Section 01340. List each surface and its proposed paint products and systems. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Comply with provisions of Section 01630. B. Submit substitute paint schedule listing each surface and its proposed products. C. Submit complete supporting data, specifications; and identifying numbers of each proposed product. D. Do not order or deliver materials until Architect's approval is obtained 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.08 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION: A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete -work. B. Protect completed painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work: 1.09 EXTRA PAINT: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1) gallon of each color of latex paint used, and two (2) quarts of each enamel color used. 1.10 GUARANTEE: This Contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this- contract for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pratt and Lambert,unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pittsburgh Paints, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, DeVoe, Cook and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are ofequaltype and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of -a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. C._ Secondary _products such as linseed oil, .turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. E. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits for' -paint and coating materials- shall comply with requirements of governing regulatory agency. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING: A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by Architect. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for _ specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer: do not exceed thinning directions. 09900 - 2 L i 2.03 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: A. Compounds: Pre -fill powdered joint compound, taping compound and r„ topping compound, ASTM C475-70. B. Joint Tape: Perforated tape, ASTM C475-70. MrM^ PART 3 - EXECUTION t` 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify Architect in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 7 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather, or when temperature is below 50 deg. F. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. C. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be clean before painting. D. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint. E. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than 60 deg. F. for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. F. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. G. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. H. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. 3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PAINTING REQUIREMENTS: A. Paint metal surfaces, including pipes, conduit, machinery, equipment panels and boxes where exposed in finished spaces, mechanical rooms or on exterior. Paint equipment Machinery Gray unless otherwise noted. Paint pipes and conduits to match color of adjacent surfaces unless otherwise directed by Architect. B. Metal surfaces delivered with prime coat shall have abrasions touched up and finish coats applied as specified. C. Touch up abrasions in factory finishes. D. Paint exposed underside of cast iron sinks and fixture supporting members or structure with 2 coats of enamel. E Paint air conditioning grilles, registers, ceiling diffusers and speaker grilles to match color of adjacent surfaces unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Paint exposed conduit supports, clamps, hangers, and exposed conduit and boxes in accordance with painting schedule. 09900 - 3 G. Paint panelboards and other cabinets in accordance with painting schedule to match color of adjacent surfaces, when located in finished spaces other than closets or mechanical/electrical rooms. H. Paint surfaces inside of ducts,diffusers and other mechanical openings which are exposed to view flat black. J. Do not paint nameplates on equipment or labels on doors and frames. 3.04 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: A. Wash. metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil, or. grease before applying primer. Remove -rust or scale' by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. B. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment such as Lithoform, by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pa., or Galvaprep #5, by Neilson -Chemical Co., Detroit, Mich. C. Fill scratches, cracks, and abrasions in drywall with a spackling compound flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal before application of priming coat. D. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch-up factory prime coat before applying first coat. E. Touch-up shop coats on metal surfaces before applying finish. F. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. G. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT: A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer wallboard. Prefill, tape, fill and finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other. imperfections. Treat joints of all face layers of all gypsum board fire proofing and fire rated construction in exposed and concealed locations, 3.06 APPLICATION: A. Final coat ofpaintshall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes,. or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only upon written approval of the Architect. C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding _ coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. 09900 - 4 G. Each coat of ;paint applied shall, be inspected by Architect before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide Architect a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. Architect reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat, at no additional cost. H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (MWF) r; thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Where shown provide minimum dry film (MDF) thickness shown in schedule. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.07 CLEANING AND PATCHING: A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire r section to corners or visible stopping point. 3.08 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING: EXTERIOR METAL First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Tech guard Zinc Primer (MWF 2.1 mils) Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Effecto Enamel (MWF 2.7 mils) Third Coat: Pratt & Lambert Effecto Enamel (MWF 2.7 mils) NOTE: First coat not required on items delivered with shop coat applied. Use this finish on all exterior ferrous metal including exposed structural steel. EXTERIOR GALVANIZED METAL First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Tech Guard Zinc Primer (MWF 4.6 mils) Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Effecto Enamel (MWF 2.7 mils) Third Coat: Pratt & Lambert Effecto Enamel (MWF 2.7 mils) NOTE: See Interior Metal - Epoxy Finish for all hollow metal doors and frames. INTERIOR METAL - SEMI -GLOSS FINISH First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Interior Trim Primer (MWF 2.3 mils) Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite Enamel Undercoating (MWF 2.7 mils) Third Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vitralite Enamel Dull or Eggshell (MWF 3.6 mils) NOTE: Use this finish for all interior ferrous metal including exposed structural steel except where other finishes are required. First coat not required on items delivered with prime coat. INTERIOR METAL - EPDXY FINISH (WATER BASE) r- First Coat: Tnemec Tufcoat Series III (2.0 minimum dry mils) Second Coat: Tnemec Tufcoat Series III (2.0 minimum dry mils) NOTE: Use epoxy paint on ferrous metal including all hollow metal doors and frames. INTERIOR INSULATED PIPE COVERINGS i- First Coat: Pratt & Lambert Vapex Wall Primer (MWF 3.2 mils) Second Coat: Pratt & Lambert Lyt-All Flowing Flat (MWF 2.7 mils) �^ i 09900 - 5 No Text SECTION 10521 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS - HAND UNITS` o. r., PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Where shown on the Drawings, furnish and install fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets. t 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work r, i' specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Carpentry - Section 06100 Drywall Construction - Section 09250 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: r A. Manufacturers: Model numbers included for fire extinguisher f equipment are items manufactured by J. L. Industries and are listed as a standard quality. Equivalent items of the following manufacturer is acceptable: Larsen's Manufacturing Company B. Reference Standards: All material and installation shall conform to applicable requirements of the standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 10- 1975. C. State and Local Building Codes: Comply with state and local governing regulations pertaining to fire protection equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate type, sizes and mounting details of each extinguisher, cabinet and bracket. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Dry Chemical Extinguisher: 5 lb. Cosmic E Series, Model No. 5, j' enamel steel with U. L. rating 2A-1OBC. B. Single Cabinet: Clear Vu 1525 Mini -Shallow Wall Cabinet, flat trim, clear acrylic convex bubble door, and aluminum door frame. Anodized aluminum finish. 10521 - 1 L PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 lbs. shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5' above the floor. Extinguishers having a gross weight greater than 40 lbs. shall be so installed that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 3-1/2' above the floor. B. Contractor shall be responsible for filling and servicing fire ,extinguishers. End of Section 10521 - 2 Y SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide toilet accessories complete including mounting devices. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Wood Blocking - Section 06100 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: 1. Unless otherwise noted, model numbers included for toilet accessories are items manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., and are listed as a standard of quality. Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory. 2. Equivalent items of the following manufacturers are acceptable: Bradley Corporation The Charles Parker Company American Dispenser Company B. Regulatory Requirements: Operating hardware shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101- 336). 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples: Submit one representative sample of each item and model specified, if requested by Architect. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list, and installation requirements for each accessory item specified, in accordance with Section 01340. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. D. Protection: 1. Maintain protective covers on units until installation is complete. 2. Remove protective covers at final clean-up of installation. 10800 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Stainless Steel: Type 302/304, ASTM A167-82, finish No. 4 satin. B. Steel: 1. Cold Rolled Sheet: ASTM A366-72, commercial quality. 2. Zinc Coated: ASTM A123-78. 3. Chromium Plating: ASTM B456-79, Type SC2. C. Aluminum: 1. Extruded: 6063-T5 alloy, anodized satin finish. 2. Sheet Stock: 5005-H14. D. Brass: Cast or forged quality alloy, FS WW-P-541-80. E. Concealed Mounting Devices: Theft resistant, galvanized steel, ASTM A386-78 or stainless steel. F. Exposed Mounting Devices: Theft resistant, finished to match accessories. 2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES: (SEE SCHEDULE) 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate recessed units with seamless one piece flange on exposed face. B. Locked dispensing units: Key alike for all accessories. C. Weld corners, leaving no open miters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Check opening scheduled to receive recessed units for correct dimensions, plumbness of blocking or frames, preparation that would affect installation of accessories. B. Check areas to receive surface mounted units for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work. C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions that affect installation of accessories. D. Do not begin installation of washroom accessories until openings and surfaces are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Accessories shall be, located as -indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Architect. B. Mount recessed accessories into wall openings with wood screws through cabinet side into wood blocking. C. Mount surface mounted accessories with wood screws into wood blocking, plumb and align. D. Grab Bars: The structural strength of grab bars and handrails, fasteners, and mounting devices, as finally installed, shall be capable of supporting a steady force of 250 lbs. applied in any direction. Grab bars and handrails shall not rotate in their mountings. 10800 2 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust accessories for proper operation. B. After completion of installation, clean and polish all exposed ,,.. surfaces. i C. Deliver keys and instruction sheets to Owner. 3.04 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE: A. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Provide one toilet paper holder for each water closet as follows: B-2730 at each water closet. NOTE: Secure with vandal resistant screws. B. Soap Dispensers: Provide one soap dispenser for each wall hung lavatory and sink as follows: B-111 at sinks and service sinks. C. Paper Towel Dispensers: Provide one towel dispenser at each wall hung lavatory and sink. Dispensers shall be equal to the following: 8-263 D. Robe Hooks: Provide robe hooks as follows: One B-2116 mount on back of doors to toilet. E. Mop Strips: Provide one mop strip located as directed by Architect 8-224 x 36". F. Grab Bars: Provide grab bars as follows: One B-6206 x 36" and one B-6206 x 42" at Toilet 105. G. Handrails: Provide 2 handrails at new ramp in Cat Kennel 3 (Alternate No. 2 only), equal to B-603 x length shown on the Drawings, complete with brackets, end returns, and 252 series and 2522 series mountings. End of Section 10800 - 3 SECTION 11001 - SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide Special Equipment indicated by the. Contract Documents, and furnish all supplementary items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the project. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Alternates - Section 01100 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: Finish hardware, operating controls, mounting heights, etc. shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of special equipment herein specified. Furnish a detail schedule of equipment with room space identification for each item. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340. B. Samples: Submit samples of each item for approval if requested by the Architect. If item is approved it will be returned to the Contractor for installation on the job. If item is not approved it will be returned to the Contractor for disposal. 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Stainless Steel: Comply with AISI, Type 302/304. Provide No. 4 polished finish, unless otherwise specified. B. Brass: Cast or forged quality alloy complying with FS WW-P-541. C. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality material complying with ASTM A366-72. Provide surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish, in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. D. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on metal, complying with ASTM B456-79, Type SC 2. E. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, baked acrylic enamel coating. F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication comply with ASTM A386-78. 2.02 KENNELS: A. Provide pre -fabricated kennels equal to those manufactured by T- Kennel Systems, Inc., Eugene, Oregon, (800) 377-7103, (503) 344- 7556. B. Front gate panel and door: Frame: 1" x 1" x .065" steel tubing. Panel: 1" x 2-5/8" 7 gauge slotted weld wire. 11001 - 1 i C. Sloped side panel (Standard Kennel): Frame: 1 x 1" x 0.65" steel tubing. Upper Section: 2'-0"h. 1-1/4 x 3-1/4" x 7 gauge slotted welded wire. Lower Section: 4'-0"h. panel composed of EPS foam sandwiched between .093 thick Kydex acrylic PVC sheets, assembled to frame with sealant and aluminum rivets, with adjustable drop bar at bottom of side panel to adjust to floor slope. D. Sloped side panel (Isolation Kennel): Frame: 1" x 111.x .065" steel tubing. Panel: 6'-0"h. panel constructed the same as for standard kennel lower section (described above). Note: Isolation kennels do not have an upper section. E. Vertical sliding door panel: Frame: I" x 1-1/2" x .065" square tubing. Upper Section: 36-1/2" high x 46-11/16" wide sheet of .093" thick .Kydex fastened to frame with aluminum rivets. Pulley System: Operated from both ends of run. Brackets electroplated steel with Delrin plastic wheels. Cable to be 1/8" galvanized steel. Counterweight system complete with all fittings and attachments. Aluminum ferrules attach cables to doors and counterweights. F. Floor panel (raised -floor models only): Frame: 1" x 1" x .065 steel tubing. Floor panel: .187 thick sheet -of Kydex attached to frame with stainless steel fasteners. G. Top panels (at isolation kennels only): Frame: 1" x 1" angle steel. Panel: 4 x 4" x 6 gauge slotted welded. H. Drain covers: Free standing full'IT" covers and wall mounted 1/2 "T" covers of 16 gauge steel. I. Finish: All steel tubing and wire shall be galvanized after fabrication. All Kydex panels shall be beige. J. Drainage system (raised floor models only): Provide trench drain system with "T cover, built-in to kennels by kennel manufacturer, complete with sloping trench and outlets where required on the Drawings. K. Sizes: Island kennels shall be 12'-0" long x 6'-0" high, in widths as indicated on the Drawings. L. Provide kennel configurations as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 TOILET ROOM SIGNS: All new toilet rooms shall have wall mounted signs. Sign design and installation shall comply with the applicable I equirements of Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes,. Elimination,of Architectural Barriers Act, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and as follows: A. Sign Background Stock: 1/8" thick phenolic material. Color as selected by Architect.' B. Character proportion: fetters and numbers on signs should have a width -to -height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width -to - height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10, utilizing an upper-case "X" for measurement. 11001 - 2 C. Color Contrast: Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background; light colored characters on dark backgrounds generally provide the greatest readability and are preferred. Characters and r• background finish shall be eggshell, matte or other non -glaze a finish. Colors shall be as selected by Architect. D. Tactile Characters And Symbols: Characters, symbols, or pictographs on signs required to be tactile, shall be raised 1/32 inch minimum. Letters and numbers shall be upper case sans serif characters and shall be accompanied with Grade 2 Braille, Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inch high, but no higher than two inches; and shall be proportioned in accordance with subparagraph B. above. Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description ` placed directly below the pictogram. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6" minimum in height. Letter and sign sizes shall be as selected by Architect. E. Mounting- Height And Location: Tactile signage used for room identification shall be mounted on the wall on the latch (strike) r side of doors at a height of 60 inches above the floor or ground surface to center line of sign. Where there is no wall space to the latch side of door, including double leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall. Mounting location for such r„ signage shall be so that a person may approach to within 3" of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of a door. Mounting height shall be uniform throughout the building. Mount signs with double sided tape and GE silicone sealant. Mounting height shall be as selected by Architect. F. Approved sign suppliers: Acme Marking Products Corp. 2112 19th Street Lubbock, Texas 79408 Telephone: (806) 763-9060 The Southwell Co. 928 No. Alamo San Antonio, Texas 78215 Telephoner (512) 223-8517 G. Sign Schedule: C COPY QUANTITY LOCATION r TOILET * 1 Kennels 104 on wall adjacent to strike side of Door 9 to Toilet 105. * Denotes requirement for international symbol of accessibility to be included with written copy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Install special equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. B. Use concealed fastenings whenever possible, except where otherwise specified. 11001 - 3 r i C. Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary fasteners, and attach _ accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed. D. Provide products of.the same manufacturer; for each type of equipment .- exposed in the same areas, wherever possible. Coordinate with the Architect for acceptable designs and finishes. E. Provide -locks where specified, with the same keying for all accessory units in the project wherever possible. 3.02 ROUGH -IN AND FINAL CONNECTIONS: A. On items indicated to be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make the necessary field measurements, and to adequately provide in the new construction for such requirements. B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary rough -in electrical or plumbing' for each item of equipment herein specified regardless. C. final connections for Contractor and'Owner furnished equipment shall be made by the project contractors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. End of Section 11001 - 4 r r k SECTION 13121 - PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Furnish all materials and labor to erect the metal building shown on the drawings and herein specified. It is recognized that the manufacturers are proprietary in nature and differ considerably in concept, design, structure, methods of fabrication and erection. For these reasons, these specifications will be of the performance type only, leaving in most cases the construction details and materials.to the manufacturer's standards. Shape and design shall be compatible with the Drawings and collateral material, indicated and specified. Although the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids or waive any irregularities or formalities in any bids or in the bidding, the award will be made to the bidder whose bid represents, in the Owner's evaluation and judgment, the most advantageous combination of value .to be delivered per dollar bid. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Concrete Work - Section 03300 Miscellaneous Metal Section 05500 Sealant - Section 07900 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100 Painting - Section 09900 1.04 REFERENCE: The following standards and criteria, of most recent issue, shall be used where applicable in the structural design of the building covered by this specification: Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA) "Recommended Design Practices Manual" American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Steel Construction Manual" The Aluminum Association (AA) "Aluminum Construction Manual" American Welding Society "Code for Welding in Building Construction" American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual" American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 13121 - 1 Military. Specifications (Mil. Spec.) International Conference of Building Officials "Uniform Building Code", 1988 Edition 1.05 SUBMITTAL: A. Each bid shall be accompanied by drawings, descriptive literature, and design data which will substantiate that the proposed building is equal to or exceeds these specifications. B. Within three weeks of notification of Owner's intent to award a contract,, the bidder shall furnish to the Architect erection drawings showing anchor bolt settings, sidewall, endwall, and accessory installation details to clearly indicate the proper assembly of all building parts. The manufacturer shall furnish a certificate that the design meets or exceeds the design criteria herein specified. The completed certificate of compliance shall be completed and signed by a registered professional engineer. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. C. Warranty: This Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that all work under this -contract shall be free from defects of material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of this work. Warranty shall provide for replacement of defective work and all other work damaged thereby, at no cost to the Owner. D. Class 90: Furnish certificate that, roof panel and installation conforms to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Class 90 wind uplift rating. E. Samples and Descriptive Data: The following shall be submitted for approval, if requested, in accordance with Section 01340: 1. Accessories: One sample of each type of flashing, trim, closures, caps and similar items. Size shall be sufficient to show construction and configuration. Furnish detailed drawings of all connections between accessories and building, showing all "flashing sealing and waterproofing. 2. Covering Roof and Wall: One piece of each type to be used, 9 — inches long, full width. For factory color finished covering, the sample shall be accompanied by certified laboratory test reports showing that the sheets to be furnished are produced under a continuing quality control program and that a representative sample has been tested within the past 12 months and has met, the quality standards specified 3. Fasteners: Two samples of each type to be used with statement regarding intended use. 4. Insulation: One piece of each type to be used, and descriptive data covering insulation. _ 5. Gaskets and Insulating Compounds: Descriptive data. 6. Sealant: One sample, approximately 1. pound, and descriptive data. 7. Gutters and Downspouts: Descriptive data for each if not fully covered by shop drawings, 8. Skylight Panel: One piece, 9 inches long, full width. 13121 - 2 4 t F 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Materials shall'be delivered to the site in a dry a and undamaged condition and stored out of contact with the ground. Materials other than framing and structural members shall be covered r. with weathertight coverings and kept dry. Storage accommodations for roof and wall covering shall provide good air circulation and protection from surface staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: Metal buildings shall be the product of any manufacturer regularly and directly engaged in the design manufacture, and erection of pre-engineered metal buildings. Metal buildings shall have vertical walls, gable roofs, and as follows: A. Clear span rigid frame with straight columns. Building dimensions shall be as shown on the Drawings. Frame and covering may be matched and prepunched to receive fasteners, or the drilling of holes for fasteners may be performed in the field. The completed buildings shall be free of excessive noise from wind induced vibrations under the ordinary weather conditions to be encountered at the location where the building is erected, and meet all specified design requirements. 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. General: The building shall meet or exceed all design criteria prescribed in the MBMA "Design Practices Manual" latest issue. B. Roof Slope: 1" to 12" min. C. Design Load Criteria: 1. Live Loads: Roof Panels: 40 psf uniformly distributed live load. Furnish certificate that roof panel and installation conforms to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Class 90 wind uplift rating. r• Panels shall be designed in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices. r Panels shall be designed to support a 200-pound load distributed evenly over a 2' square area centered between purlins without exceeding a panel deflection -to -span ratio of 1/180 in a two - span condition. 4 Purlins: 25 psf live load uniformly distributed live load plus all dead loads. Purlins shall provide overlap continuity. Primary Framing: 25 psf live load uniformly distributed plus all dead loads. ? NOTE: Primary Frame live load reductions will not be ' allowed. 2. Wind Loads: The entire structure, coverings and trim shall be designed to withstand a basic wind speed of 90 mph, Exposure "C", Importance Factor 1.0, proportioned and applied as horizontal and uplift forces according to Chapter 23 of the i 13121 - 3 r 5' "Uniform Building Code", 1988 edition, and shall exceed recommendations in Metal Building Manufacturer's Association "Design Practices Manual", 1986 edition. Calculations shall be based on the normal force method. 3. Dead Loads: a. Actual weight of structure b. Collateral dead load (uniform) 10 p.s.f. c. Collateral dead load (concentrated) see HVAC drawings d. Suspended partitions over cages, 60 pounds per -lineal foot. 4. Girts shall provide overlap continuity. 2.03 ROOF PANELS AND WALL PANELS:_ A. Roof Panels (Base Bid): 1. Panels shall be equal to Starshield as manufactured by Star Manufacturing Co., Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, Galvalume coated, 24 gage sheet steel, coated on both sides. 2. Furnish manufacturer's 20-year warranty. B. Wall Panels: 1. Panels shall be equal to Dura-rib as manufactured by Star Manufacturing Co., 26 gage minimum, galvanized steel 1.25 oz. coating (G90) conforming to ASTM A525-75. 2. Color for factory prefinished panels shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standardcolors. Furnish manufacturer's 20-year warranty. 2.04 INSULATION: A. Roof: Immediately, below roof, install 4 (R-11) fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier. B. Walls: Install 4" (R-11) fiberglass blanket with vapor barrier at all exterior metal wall panels. C. Wall and Roof Insulation Properties: 1. Fiberglass: 0.6 pounds density. 2. Facing: White vinyl reinforced with a vapor permeance (Perm) rating of no more than 0.1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-96, Procedure A. 3. Flame Spread: Fiberglass and facing shall have a flame spread of less than 25 and shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc., label. Insulation shall comply with UL-723 and TIMA-202 standards. D. Joints: All insulation joints shall be positively sealed using methods recommended by the manufacturer, such as folding and. stapling, and/or adhesives. 2.05 ACCESSORIES: Flashing, gutters, downspouts, roof jacks, trim, metal closure strips, caps,' and similar metal accessories shall be not less than the minimum thickness specified for panels. Accessories of zinc - coated steel to be used with aluminum or aluminum -coated steel panels shall be painted. Molded closure strips shall be bituminous saturated fiber, closed -cell synthetic rubber or neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride premolded to match configuration of the covering. 13121 - 4 r 2.06 FASTENERS: Shall be of type and sizes best suited for the purpose. Fasteners for securing panels and accessory items 'shall be aluminum or 300 or 400 series corrosion resisting steel. Gasketed washers or a material compatible with the covering and with a minimum diameter of 3/8 inch for structural connections shall be provided to waterproof the fastener penetration on the exterior side. Gasketed portion of washers shall be neoprene or other equally durable elastomeric material approximately 1/8 inch thick. When panels are factory color finished, exposed fasteners shall be factory color finished or provided with plastic color caps to match the panels. 2.07 INSULATION RETAINERS: Shall be type, size and design necessary to adequately hold the insulation and to provide a neat appearance. Metallic retaining members shall be nonferrous or have a nonferrous coating. Non-metallic retaining members, including adhesives used in conjunction with mechanical retainers or at insulation seams, shall have a fire resistance classification not less than that permitted for the insulation. 2.08 SEALANT: Shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, as best suited for the particular joint. 2.09 GASKETS AND INSULATING COMPOUNDS: Shall be nonabsorptive and suitable for insulating contact points of incompatible materials. Insulating compounds shall be nonrunning after drying. 2.10 SHOP PAINTING: Ferrous surfaces shall be cleansed of oil, grease, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances and shop primed. Primer coating shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's standard system. Gutters, downspouts, louvers and ventilators shall be shop painted in the manufacturer's standard color. 2.11 SKYLIGHTS: A. Skylights shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester with profile to match roof panels and shall be fire -retardant with U.L. flame spread rating of 25 or less ASTM D-635-76. Skylights shall be equal to Star Starshield LTP translucent frost white, tedlar clad. 2.12 EXTERIOR LOUVERS: See Mechanical — Division 15 3.01 GENERAL: Erection shall be in accordance with the approved erection instructions and drawings and the requirements herein. Dissimilar materials which are not compatible when contacting each other shall be insulated from each other by means of gaskets or insulating compounds. Improper or mislocated drill holes shall be plugged with an oversize screw fastener, with a gasketed washer: however, sheets with an excess of such holes or with such holes in critical locations will be rejected. Exposed surfaces shall be kept clean and free from sealant, metal cuttings, and other foreign materials. Concrete work is specified in Section 03300. 13121 - 5 3.02 :FRAMING AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS: Anchor bolts shall be accurately set by template while the concrete is in a plastic state. Uniform bearing under base plates and sill members shall beaccuratelyspaced to assure proper -fitting of covering. As erection progresses, the work shall be securely fastened to resist the dead load and wind erection stresses. 3.03 WALL PANELS AND ROOF PANELS: Stained, discolored or damaged sheets shall be removed from the site. Wall panels shall be applied with the longitudinal configurations in the vertical position; roof panels shall be applied with the longitudinal configurations in the direction of the �— roof slope. Except for self -framing buildings, end laps shall be made over framing members with fasteners into framing members approximately 20 inches from .the end of the overlapping sheet. Side laps shall be laid away from the prevailing winds. Side lap distances, end lap distances, -joint sealing, and spacings of fasteners shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice insofar as the maximum fastener spacings specified are not exceeded and provided such standard practice will result in a structure which will be free from water leaks and meet design requirements. Spacing of fasteners shall present an orderly appearance and shall not exceed: 8 inches on center intermediate supports, 12 inches on center at side laps of roof coverings, and 18 inches on center at side laps of wall covering except when otherwise approved. Fasteners shall be installed in straight lines within a tolerance of 1/2 inch in the length of a bay. Side laps and end laps of roof and wall covering and joints at accessories shall be sealed. Fasteners shall.be driven normal to the surface and to a uniform depth to properly seat the gasketed washers. Accessories shall be fastened into framing members, except as otherwise approved. 3.04 INSULATION: Except as otherwise shown or approved, insulation shall be installed against panels and between supporting members and in a manner to present a neat appearance. Blanket insulation shall have facing at joints lapped and fastened in a manner that will provide tight joints. Exposed roof insulation shall be securely fastened without loose joints and unsightly sags. Insulation retainers shall be securely fastened in place. Roof insulation shall be installed using roll runner method. 3.05 FIELD PAINTING: Immediately upon detection, abraded or corroded spots on shop -painted surfaces shall be wire brushed and touch up with the same materials used for the shop coat. Shop -primed ferrous surfaces exposed on the outside of the building and all shop -primed surfaces of doors shall be painted with two coats of an approved exterior enamel. Factory color finished surfaces shall be touched up as necessary with the manufacturer's recommended touch-up paint. 13121 - 6 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE Date: Building: City of Lubbock Animal Shelter Lubbock, Texas The referenced building has been designed to meet the following criteria: I. The design meets or exceeds the minimum requirements of the following Standards: 1. Metal Building Manufacturers Association "Recommended Design Practices Manual" 2. American Institute of Steel Construction "Steel Construction Manual" 3. The Aluminum Association "Aluminum Construction Manual" 4. American Welding Society "Code for Welding in Building Construction" 5. American Iron and Steel Institute "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual" 6. American Society for Testing and Materials 7. Uniform Building Code, 1988 edition II.. The blanket insulation complies with U.L.-723 and TIMA-202 standards. III. The roof panels are designed to meet the requirements for Underwriters Laboratory Class 90 uplift rating, and it is understood that a Class 90 certificate will be furnished after the installation is complete. The UL roof deck construction no. is IV. The north exterior wall (nearest the existing building) was designed to conform to the U.L. fire resistance directory Design U425-2 hr. V. The design was made using the following loads: 1. Full actual dead loads. 2. Wind load at basic wind speed of 90 mph, Exposure "C", Importance Factor 1.0, per Chapter 23 of the "Uniform Building Code", 1988 edition and exceeding MBMA "Design Practices Manual", 1986 edition. 3. Live loads of 25 p.s.f. on primary members and purlins without live load reductions. 4. Live load of 40 p.s.f. on roof panels. 5. Live load of 200 pounds distributed over a 2 f t. x 2 f t. area on roof panels at mid -span between purlins with the deflection not exceeding 1/180 of the span. 6. Wall girt deflection under full wind loads is 1/180 of the span where no masonry veneer occurs, and 1/240 of the span where masonry veneer occurs. Deflection criteria applies inwardly and outwardly. 7. Additional Loads: Suspended Partitions: is/are included in full actual loads noted above. Signature: (ENGINEER'S SEAL) End of Section 13121 - 7 r� u SECTION 15010 - GENERAL �.. PART 1 - GENERAL ` 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and labor as required for the installation of a plumbing, ventilation, heating and air conditioning systems, all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements for work required under this section. i 1.03 SUBMITTAL: A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be -submitted at one time in a bound folder with an index of submittal. 1.04 REGULATIONS: A. All work shall be done in strict accordance and compliance with State and Local Laws, together with regulations of the particular Utility r.. Companies concerned. B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities. 1.05 DRAWINGS: A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly i provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete Contract. B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the work contemplated. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these specifications or shown on the plans. C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions, supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become, necessary because of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. i~ 15010 - 1 D. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all _ conditions to insure that the work as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined. — E. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances will: be made for prefabricated, material or on job materials which can not be used due to actual conditions. _ 1.06 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS: A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these sppecifications, it has been done, in most cases, in order to establish a standard. Where the phrase "or equal", or its equivalent is used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment, the products of others, than the particular manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. Where the phrase "or equal" or its equivalent, is not used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment only the pproducts of the manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable. B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specified by name, he shall be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved.. Any expense incurred because of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment. C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the _ following sections, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete" list of the materials which he proposes to use. The list shall give the., manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, necessary to give full and complete — details for the completed installation. D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or interior quality, must be replaced by.an acceptable item within - two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such — rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly bound brochures for approval. 7 1.07 PRECEDENCE: A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the following sequence: 1. Soil and waste piping 2. Duct work 3. Cold and hot water piping _ 4. Electric wiring 15010 2 1.08 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Bidders upon the work under these headings shall visit the site to satisfy themselves as to the nature and scope of the work to be done before submitting bids. B. Submission of a bid will be taken as evidence that examination of the site has been made and that all such conditions that will effect the work have been taken into consideration. C. Information given or not given on the plans shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. �. 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS: j A. The Contractor shall protect the work and all materials (whether incorporated in the building or not) and shall cover openings to protect the building from the weather. r`. B. The Contractor shall provide protection of all work in progress and Y shall be responsible for all damage done to the Owner's property or �^ to any adjacent properties during the construction. 1.10 COOPERATION: 11 A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and a other contractors to properly coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts. r" 1.11 INTERFERENCES: A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be kept as close as .possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it a must be furnished and installed by the contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets or equipment may be varied a reasonable amount by the Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner. C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper maintenance. 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING: �- A. Each Contractor shall do all necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions, ceiling, pavements, etc., as required for the proper installation of his work under these contracts in a neat and workmanlike manner and as approved by the Architect. No structural r, r member shall be cut by the Contractor without first obtaining written R, permission from the Architect. B. All drilling and patching for expansion bolts, hangers and other supports shall be done by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. C. Labor and materials required to replace or rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished at this Contractor's expense, subject to Architect's satisfaction and approval. D. Each Contractor shall be responsible for damages to other Contractor's installations and equipment. 15010 - 3 7 1.13 CONTINUATION OF OPERATIONS: �- A. The Contractor shall realize that the existing adjacent buildings house a going institution and must remain in operation throughout the construction period. _ B. Any interruption in utilities shall be coordinated with the Architect a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and, if required, shall occur outside the normal operating hours of the building. C. Special care shall be taken while performing work in the existing portion of the buildings to assure neat appearances in those areas being used .at all times during the business hours. All excess materials, tools, equipment and debris shall be removed and the area left clean at the end of each day. 1.14 DEMOLITION: A. Each contractor shall remove those items shown on the plans to be removed for each respective trade. B. All items to be removed or discarded are property of the Owner and shall be stacked as. directed by the Architect or Owner unless notified by the Architect to become property of the Contractor in which case all items shall be removed from the site. C. Contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing _ facilities than is absolutely necessary. All concrete to be removed shall be cored or.sawed to widths to allow the installation of pipes or conduits indicated and replaced by Contractor who occasions the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects Materials and — equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label.B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of the job. C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each day. D. Each. Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract. E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with the best practice of the trade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SOUND ISOLATION: A. To prevent sound transmission and vibration, all operating equipment - shall be isolated from the building construction by means of 15010 4 r F �- mountings designed to obtain the highest efficiency of sound l isolation. Isolator sizes and methods of installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations of Chapter 42 of the 1991 ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications." 3.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports ¢ required by equipment included in his work. B. All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment connections. C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4" and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufactured by Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will not be permitted. j' D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be �. supported by hanger rods of the following size: 1. Pipes up to and including 2" 3/8" rods 2. 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods 3. 4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods 4. 6" pipe 3/4" rods E. Where pipes are supported from overhead concrete construction, the hanger rods shall be provided as detailed on the plans. F. If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor shall cooperate with the other involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. 3.03 FLASHING: A. Each pipe which projects through the roof or through a waterproof deck shall be flashed with "Dektite" flashing for metal roofs (as manufactured by Illinois Tool Works or approved equal. Mechanical Contractor shall provide flashings to the General Contractor for installation. 3.04 FIRE PARTITIONS: A. Any penetrations through a fire wall or floor shall have the ancillar space sealed with a fire retardant material such as Link -Seal or equal. 3.05 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES: A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken pipes or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the r Contractor's expense. Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system. Anchors shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure. 15010 - 5 r 3.06 UNIONS: A. Unions shall not be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. Where copper pipe joins iron. or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "Bakelite" insulator shall be used. 3.07 ESCUTCHEONS: A. Where exposed to view, pipes insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be filled with near, heavy spun or stampPed steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on" type escutcheons will not be permitted. 3.08 SOIL CONDITIONS: A. This specification and drawings in noway stipulate the condition of the soil to be encountered. When excavation may be required in execution of the work, this Contractor agrees that he has informed himself regarding conditions that may appear or seem to be implied in any portion of the Contract Documents. 3.09 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPING: A. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall be excavated 12" beyond required depths. The bottom of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the required fall. Bell holes shall be excavated so that pipe will rest on solid ground for its entire length. Sewer shall be laid in a separate trench, except where otherwise noted on the drawings. Before backfilling of pipe, Contractor shall provide _ blow -sand and/or clean river sand in bottom of all trenches, 12 deepp. B. Backfilling: After pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and _ approved by the Architect, and prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed, and the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Backfi l l shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8" in thickness, and properly moistened to approximate optimum _ requirements. Each layer shall be compacted by hand or machine tampers or by other suitable equipment to a density that will prevent excessive settlement or shrinkage. Backfill shall be brought to a -- suitable elevation above grade to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage thereof. Blow -sand and/or river sand shall be laced overpipe, 8" minimum, above top of pipe before backfill is begun. _ Backfill material shall be type as specified in Section 02200, Excavating, Filling and Grading. C. Where gravel, streets, paved streets, sidewalks, etc., are disturbed, cut and damaged in making connections to city sewer, water lines, gas dines, electric and telephone lines, the expense of repairing same in an approved manner, as required, shall be included under this contract. 3.10 UTILITY CONNECTIONS: A. Utility connection locations, depths, sizes, characteristics and 15010 - 6 capacities shall be verified"by each Contractor utilizing these items and any discrepancies from those shown on the plans shall be brought to the Architect's attention before bidding. Any and all utility connections shall be made by the Contractor, as required, with no ! increase to the Owner above the price indicated in the Contractor's ! proposal. 3.11 PAINTING: A. No painting will be required under this section. 3.12 TESTING: A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of these specifications. F 3.13 ELECTRICAL: A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved. B. The Contractor furnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor shall furnish such motor controls and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches, starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet (3') and shall be attached to the terminal housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket. C. Where automatic controls are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves, thermostats, etc., shall be installed by the Contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring necessary shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a control wiring diagram to the Electrical Contractor. D. Starters on air cooled condensing units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Starters for Heating and Ventilating units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 3.14 PIPE SLEEVES: A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed -to view shall be equipped with cast brass escutcheons. B. All sleeves installed in vertical position shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe. All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast iron pipe unless otherwise noted, welded to steel plate in vertical position as detailed on the drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe passing through same, and a minimum of 1" larger than pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass through sleeves. C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade. oversize pipe sleeves, 2 diameters larger,made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service pipe and sleeves shall 15010 - 7 rr 1 be filled with picked oakum and cement, or lead where required.. to make a waterproof joint D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the Drawings. Copper pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between pipe and sleeves Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube. E. Where any pipe ppasses through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the Contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., or approved equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve of correct size for pipe and insulation. 3.15 INSULATING COUPLINGS: A. This Contractor shall furnish and install 'insulating couplings wherever piping material changes from galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and where shown on the drawings. 3.16 INSULATION: A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of these specifications. 3.17 LABELS: A. Heating and air conditioning units shall have a permanent metal tag or laminated plastic (min. thickness .093 inch) attached by riveting to identify as shown on the drawings. Letters on tag shall be 1/4" to 3/8" in height. 3.18 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES: A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel or'chromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws 3.19 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION: A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 3.20 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner. Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating instructions and wiring diagrams. 3.21 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS: A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over a sufficient period of time to prove the propper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the Specifications. 15010 - 8 3.22 GUARANTEE: A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification. 0 End of Section 15010 - 9 t'. SECTION 15020 - TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide specified authorities. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS . testing and testing as required by governing applicable, clauses and regulations for other 2.01 SUBMITTAL: A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit a certificate signed by the all tests have been satisfactoril PART 3 - EXECUTION y 3.01 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air conditioning contractor, shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Soil or waste piping located underground shall be tested before backfilling. Provide the necessary valves for cutting off existing work not to be tested. B. The contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local Authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated until no further leaks or defects are ,indicated. D. Drainage System: The entire drainage, roof drainage, and venting system shall have all necessary openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest vent stack without showing a drop of greater than four inches (4"). Where a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner as described for the entire system, except that a vertical stack ten feet (10') above the highest horizontal line to be tested may be installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure, or a pump may be used to supply the required pressure. The pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. E. All Domestic Hot and Cold Water System: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and setting of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not less than eight (8) hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water system shall be tested as above specified. 15020 - 1 r* F. Gas Piping: All gas piping shall be tested under a pressure of 15" of mercury air pressure for a period of twenty-four (24) hours and be proof tight. G. Air Balancing: All supply and return air registers shall be balanced _ by the Contractor to supply CFM shown, and results of all tests, together with type of equipment used, shall be submitted to the Architect's office at completion of the job, and if the Architect deems it necessary, this Contractor shall perform such tests as may be necessary to illustrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that equipment installed performs properly. All balancing of air shall be done by the Contractor in the presence of the Architect's Field Representative. If Contractor does balance air systems, but work is not done in the presence of the Architect's field representative, all work shall be 'redone in the presence of the Architect's field representative. End of Section 15020 - 2 is SECTION 15060 - PIPING ,. f PART 1 - GENERAL k- 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fitting as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. �^ 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTAL: l A. All submittal required, by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING GENERALLY: A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified under specific headings. B. Pipe ends shallbesquare cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean to remove cuttings. Before installation, pipe r shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to remove cuttings and other foreign material from interior. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside. j' C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or I "Jointite" used on male threads only. Omit compound on two (2) end starting threads. .- D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted. E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and near together shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other work, to permit not less than 112" between finished coverings on the different services. F. No unions are to be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions must be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, etc., and one (1) side of all check valves, thermostatic traps, and at all pieces of equipment such as pumps, condensers, tanks, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. � G. Each Contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pippee f'r supports indicated or called for specifically, or that may be required to support his particular equipment and material, unless hangers are definitely indicated as being furnished by others. All horizontal runs of piping shall be securely supported by pipe hangers spaced not more than 10' apart, and closer when necessary to prevent r- sagging. Soil pipe shall be supported every 5'. x I 15060 - 1 H. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed for any part of hangers. J. Swing joints, offsets, and anchors shall be provided in piping where required to provide for and control expansion or contraction of pipe. K. All piping, except waste piping, shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.02 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION: A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor: from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.03 MATERIALS: A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the schedule following: 1. Plastic DWV pipe and fittings: a. Underground sanitary drainage piping within the building line and exterior of the building line. b. Aboveground vent and drainage piping., 2. Standard weight galvanized steel water piping with screwed malleable fittings: a Aboveground vent piping 2" and smaller where constructed in plaster pipe chases. 3._ Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a. Aboveground domestic water piping within the building 4" and smaller in size. b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings. 4. Type K hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a.. Domestic water supply piping underground, inside masonry walls, and under concrete slabs within the building line and elsewhere as noted to a point 5'-0" outside of building line b. Condensate piping from refrigerant cooling coil to floor drain, or waste line. 5. Standard weight black steel pipe, Schedule 40, with screwed malleable fittings: a. Aboveground gas piping within building. 6. Type M hard.drawn copper with solder fittings: a. Vent pipes in masonry walls and elsewhere as noted. 7. Polyethylene plastic pipe: a. Underground gas piping to within three feet of the building. 8. Fuse seal acid resistant piping: a'.. Underground sanitary drainage and vent piping where shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COPPER WATER PIPING; A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without sppringing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the structural portions of the building. Piping aboveground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or 15060 2 noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings or approved. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screws and bushing will not be permitted. Where contractor connects copper to galvanized steel piping or hot water heaters, furnish and install insulating couplings. B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connection with the water distribution system shall be 1/2" brass plugs. Additional drains shall be installed at low points on the hot-water and cold -water piping, and all ppiping shall grade down to the drains. C. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal runs of tubing over 50' in length shall be r anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve, as applicable, and where not definitely r„ r shown on the drawings shall consist of a 12" length of tubing of the same diameter as the branch supply, fitted with a cap. E. Tubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for aboveground soldered fittings shall be -corrosive flux made with a non paste and solid string silver solder, and all underground joints shall be made with silfos only. Cored solder will not be permitted. Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers to provide for exppansion and contraction of tubing. 95.5 solder shall be used to make joints extending to fixture only. r- F. Underground piping shall be a minimum of 24" below finish and/or natural grades. 3.02 SANITARY PIPING: A. DWV plastic soil pipe, where codes permit, may be used as manufactured by Tyler Pipe Industries. B. Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall be given a grade of 1/4" per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8" per foot. All I main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the roof lines as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated. Where practicable, two or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close a possible to the under side of the roof, with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps in pipes, using fittings as required. Vertical vent pipes may be connected into one (1) main vent riser above vented fixtures. Where circuit vent or wet vent from any fixture is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall be at least three feet (3') above the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of any vent line as a waste. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two (2) 15060 - 3 or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate _ venting of fixtures is noted. Branch connections to exterior downspouts shall terminate three inches (3") above finished grade. The cast-iron hub -and -spigot or no hub pipe inside of buildings shall be extended six inches (6") above ground where the lowest floor is self-supporting. This Contractor shall connect waste line from building to manhole as shown on the drawings. C. Changes in pipe size on waste, soil, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings of recessed reducers. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degrees wyes,half wyes, long -sweep bends unless otherwise directed, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks, and short 1/4 bends of elbows may be used in soi 1 and waste lines where the change in direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical, and on the discharge from water closets. D. Joints shall be made as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 3.03 GAS PIPING: — A. Gas piping shall be installed parallel with the building and water piping. In finished rooms, piping shall be run concealed in a vented space. Gas .piping shall be run under floor slabs, only as specifically noted, and then shall be in Orangeburg or PVC airtight vented sleeves with metal fitting in an approved manner. B. Joints for steel pipe shall be made with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to the male thread only. After cutting and before threading, all pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Threads shall be full cut, and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe shall remain exposed. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Joints for polyethylene. pipe shall be made with heat fusion couplings as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Underground piping shall be a minimum of 30" below finish and/or natural grade. D. Exterior underground piping may be polyethylene with PE 3306 or PE 3406 fittings if approved by local authorities. Mechanical connectors for PE pipings and for transition fittings shall be approved compression type couplings. Polyethylene pipping shall be installed in accordance with uniform plumbing code. All joints shall be heat fusion PE pipe shall be as manufactured by NIPAK, or approved equal. All PE piping shall be installed with a 16 ga. copper tracer wire. E. Make final connection to all items of equipment, as shown and -- required, using unions and shut-off valves in each location. 3.04 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER AND GAS VALVES AND FITTINGS: A. Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows: 1. Gate valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 428. Gate valves larger than 3" shall be butterfly valves instead, 2. Globe valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 14-1/2P. Globe valves larger than 3" shall be butterfly valves instead. 3. Strainers shall be 125 psi, bronze body, screwed ends, of sizes _ shown on the drawings. 4. Gas service stops shall be Crane No. 1228. 15060 - 4 i 5. Swing check valves 3""arid smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger than 3" shall be Crane No. 14493. 6. Lift check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 366E. 7. Butterfly valves shall be Centerline Series LT or Crane #23 designed for 200 psi differential pressure bubble tight shut off up to 12" size and 150 psi above 12" size. Valves through 6" shall have a locking lever handle and above 6" shall have a gear operator with a memory stop. Valves shall be furnished with tapped full lug iron bodies, type 316 s.s. discs, type 304 s.s. stems, EPT or EPDM seats and O'rings. .8. Buried water valves shall be AWWA valves, same as specified above with extended valve stem extensions. Valve sizes shall be same as pipe size receiving same. Valve stem extensions shall extend up to within 1" top of valve box. Provide valve operator to Owner at completion of job. 9. Underground gas valves shall be Figure No. 610, ductile iron, lubricated plug valves, or approved equal. Valves shall be ti equipped with extend stems and operating handle for purpose intended. Provide proper valve lubricant for natural gas service at 5-10 pounds pressure. Valve extension shall be for a bury depth of 30". Contractor may use polyethylene valves ' with polyethylene gas lines. i 10. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron valve boxes shall be furnished for each water and gas underground valve. Six inch, cast-iron pipe sections shall be used for box extensions where required. Each box shall have a cast-iron cover and shall have a flange -type base approximately 4 inches larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the barrel. Cast iron cover shall be cast with "WATER" "GAS" word and/or in top. Valve boxes shall set flush with finish grade, in 18" x 18" x 12" thick concrete pad. Valve boxes shall be as manufactured by Mueller and/or M & H. F 3.05 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS: A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their proper and permanent locations. B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced not more than 8' o.c. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported by adjustable expansion pipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or an approved equal. Hangers on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than 10' o.c. Hanger and collars shall be of size proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported. C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured to concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall be 1/4" brass bolts with 20 threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least 3" into solid concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves or proper length to bring expansion sleeves in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to tile walls or partitions, they shall be fastened with 1/4" brass toggle or through bolts. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealed by plaster. Bolts and nuts shall 15060 - - 5 be hexagon, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw heads shall be provided with chromium plated brass washers._ D. Copper pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 260 with plastic coating for non -insulated water piping and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water piping. Drainage and vent pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 590. E. All hot water supply and return piping shall be supported by approved steel hangers, spaced not more than 8' on centers, equipped with roller pipe supports equal to Fee and Mason. Figure No. 272. r End of Section 15060 6 r r SECTION 15250 - INSULATION t' PART 1 - GENERAL i 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTAL: A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION: A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air 'Conditioning Contract shall be equal to and as manufactured by F the Certain -Teed Saint Gobain Manufacturing Co., or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. B. Insulation: 1. Cold Water Piping Within Building Lines: Shall be insulated with 1" thick Certain -Teed Snap -on Glass Fiber pipe insulation, or approved equal, with a factory applied vapor barrier jacket. 2. Domestic Hot Water Supply Piping: Shall be insulated with 1" thick Certain -Teed Snap-On Glass Fiber pipe insulation, or approved equal, with a factory applied canvas jacket. Canvas jacket may be omitted underground. Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated same as cold water above, but all joints in insulation shall be sealed with a waterproof sealant. 3. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Supply Ducts: r! Shall be insulated with Certain -Teed 1-1/2" thick #150 Ultralite, or approved equal, with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in place, 1-1/2 lb. density. 4. Pipe Fittings: Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's recommendation. 1 5. Contractor shall use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior 1 insulation on all ductwork 3' from all furnaces. Duct liner shall be Certain -Teed 000 Ultralite Duct Liner, or approved equal, 3 lb. per cubic ft. density with vinyl spray one side. All transverse joints shall be protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center. C. Where insulation is shown to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required. 15250 - 1 r D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to accommodate a total thickness of two inches. Duct sizes are net inside dimensions. 2.02 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION: A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural,Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.'03 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD: 7 A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating no greater than 50. B. Canvas jacket shall have a flame spread rating not in excess of 25. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSULATION: A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. End of Section 15250 2 r- SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING i i, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows: 1. Water supply and service. 2. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the drawings and drainage systems furnished by others. 3. Gas supply system. 4. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTAL: A. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION: A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or ,. Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.02 FIXTURES: A. Furnish and install all fixtures and products in accordance with fixture schedule as shown on the drawings and as listed in Fixture Schedule or the approved equal of other manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quantity of all fixtures, drains, ,. valves, etc., as shown, as herein specified or as required to make his installation complete. Lavatory and sink hot and cold water supplies shall be provided with chromium plated loose key stops and chromium plated supplies. Immediately upon award of the contract, this Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval. a brochure giving a complete description of all fixtures, equipment and fittings which he proposes to use. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule at �- the end of this section. All plumbing fixtures, floor drains, etc.. d shall be equipped with tamperproof screws. B. All floor mounted water closets and floor mounted service sinks shall be set in a bed of plaster of paris and anchored to floor with brass anchoring bolts with brass screw caps. After fixture is set and plaster of Paris is dried, this Contractor shall caulk around base of fixture and with white General Electric Silicone sealant, or approved 15400 - 1 equal. Seal around wall mounted lavatories and urinals with white General Electric silicone sealant. C. All fixtures mounted on stud walls shall be provided with Wade Carriers. Pipe uprights shall extend up into joist space, supported from roof joist with 2" channels. Carriers shall be as follows: 1. 'Lavatories - ---- -- .-- Wade No. W-520-09 2 Service Sinks ............... Wade No. W-610 3. Urinals -- ----- ----- Wade No. W-400-AM11 4. Water Coolers ------- Wade No. W-400-AM11 2.03 TRAPS: A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections at the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall .be recess drainage pattern. All basement floor drains shall be equipped with a deep seal trap. Omit "P" traps at each floor drain in areas that feed into sandtrap or dilution basins. 2.04 CLEANOUTS: A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4" will not be required. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exterior walls shall be Wade Co. 8570-R N.B. cover and at finished floors shall be Wade Co. 8550-5 with Wade ~ No 8300-S #2, N.B. cover, or the approved equal. Omit access covers for cleanouts in other locations. All wall covers shall be cadmium plated, and all floor cleanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush with finish floor. Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade Co. 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with finish grade in 16" x 16" concrete pad, or as detailed on the drawings. 2.05 ACCESS DOORS: ` A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, a Model Z-1376, Zurn stainless steel access door, size as noted on the drawings, or -- specified elsewhere. Install gate -valves behind doors.as shown. Doors shall be provided with hexed locks, all keyed alike. 2.06 VALVE BOXES: A. This Contractor shall furnish and install butterfly valves in -cast-iron valve boxes where shown on the drawings. Boxes, covers and concrete shall be by this Contractor. Boxes shall be type as specified in piping section of these specifications. B. This Contractor shall furnish and install gate valves in concrete valve boxes where shown on the drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Utilities: This Contractor shall furnish and install, and shall pay for connections to water, gas, and sewer piping, all in accordance with requirement of the local service companies concerned. B. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross connection or 15400 - 2 '- interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the water supply system. C. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System all fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings having plumbing connections and which are furnished and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these specifications. D. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work ,.l accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. Where pipes extend through concrete members, this Contractor shall core all such members and slabs, unless sleeves have been provided. Chipping concrete will not be allowed, and if any coring of the concrete members is necessary, this Contractor shall call it to the Architect's attention before doing same. r- E. Pipe openings shall be closed with capps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At. the completion of the work the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3.02 STERILIZATION: A. The entire hot and cold water piping system shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not less than fifty (50) parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution and shall be introduced into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours, during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. All residual of 4 ppm shall be produced in all parts of the system at the end of the 24 hour period. After sterilizing, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual of chlorine content is not greater than .02 ppm unless otherwise noted. i End of Section 15400 - 3 p' i F SECTION 15650 - AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Contractor shall furnish and complete Summer -Winter, indoor as shown on the drawings and a 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other applicable requirements. install where shown on the drawings, and outdoor air conditioning systems s herein specified. clauses and regulations for other 1.03 SUBMITTAL: . A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FURNACE COIL CONDENSING UNITS: A. This Contractor shall furnish and install summer and winter heating, air conditioning and ventilation unit complete.with indoor furnace, evaporator, dampers, filters, mounting frame, and outdoor condensing unit. The system shall be as manufactured by Lennox Industries, or approved equal, including pulse furnaces and accessories, and condensing units. The unit shall be complete with all controls, filters and adapters to make a complete operable system. B. The furnace shall be gas fired and the high efficiency type with capacities as listed on the drawings. The entire furnace assembly shall be A.G.A. certified. The heat exchanger assembly shall consist of a combustion chamber, tailpipe, exhaust decoupler section and condenser coil. The combustion chamber shall have a spark plug igniter, flame sensor, combustion air and gas intake manifolds. The heat exchanger shall be constructed of cast iron. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge cold rolled steel with a baked -on enamel finish. The heat exchanger section shall be lined with 1-1/2 lb. density foil -faced fiberglass insulation. Furnaces shall be complete with variable speed direct drive blowers statically and dynamically balanced. The blower assembly shall glide out for easy servicing. The filter section shall consist of polyurethane media and shall be cleaned by washing or vacuuming. C. The evaporator coil shall be for horizontal installations and mounted in a cabinet of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish completely lined with fiberglass insulation. The cabinet shall have a deep corrosion resistant drain pan with dual drain connections. The coil shall be constructed of ripple -edge aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. The metering device shall be a thermostatic expansion valve and shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210, 15650 - 1 D. The entire furnace, coil, and filter section shall be mounted on a heavy gauge steel frame with a baked enamel finish. The frame shall have a base rail on each side with four cross braces. E. The air cooled condensing unit shall be for outdoor installations and shall be complete with all controls and wiring. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a baked enamel finish. The compressor and control box shall be located in a separate compartment lined with fiberglass insulation and have a removable panel for service access. The condensing unit shall be designed for vertical air discharge and shall have non -corrosive PVC coated steel condenser fan guard and condenser coil guard. The compressor shall be hermetically sealed with built-in protection devices for protection from excessive current and temperatures. The compressor shall be suction cooled, overload protected and equipped with a crankcase heater.and the entire running gear shall be.spring mounted. The coil section shall be constructed of rippled -edged aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. The condenser fans shall have a direct drive motor- inherently protected and totally enclosed. Other accessories for the condensing unit shall include refrigerant dryers, high pressure switch, start controls, expansion valve kit, timed -off controls and low ambient controls. The entire unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210.81 and shall be U.L. listed. 2.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Basin Unit Control System 1. Each unit shall be furnished with a heating -cooling thermostat with locking covers and sub -base switches as follows: a. System off auto heat - cool b. Fan- on - auto. 2. Each unit shall be equipped with a positive fan start device on a call for heat. 3. The condensing units shall be furnished with time off cycle devices to prevent short cycling of the compressors. They shall also have high -low pressure cutouts,. 3 leg overload protection and internal thermostats in the compressor to limit winding and discharge temperature to safe limits. 4. Refrigerant control shall be by thermostatic expansion valves. 5. In addition to the above, contactors, relays and safety devices necessary for a complete operational system shall be furnished. 2.3 DAMPER SECTION: A. Damper sections shall be installed to provide a mixing of outside air and return air from 0% to 100% of each. Damper motors shall be controlled by a wall mounted switch with damper locations marked in, 10% increments from 0 to 100. The wall switch shall have auto -off - minimum settings. In the auto position the outside intake return air and exhaust air damper motors shall modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature of 800F. In the off position the and exhaust air dampers shall close. In the minimum position the O.A. and exhaust air dampers shall be 15% open. All control devices shall be field adjustable. 15650 2 r 2.4 HUMIDITY CONTROLS: t, A. Each unit shall have a wall mounted humidistat to maintain the humidistat set point to provide reheat of the entering air to the furnace. If the return air is higher than the humidistat set point, lthe cooling coil shall be energized to provide cooling and the furnace shall be energized to heat the conditioned air. If the ambient humidity is greater than 50%, the outside air dampers shall close. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTMENT: A. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall balance the system so that the quantity and proper velocity of air is delivered at each outlet uniformly as indicated on the drawings to within ten percent (10%). Necessary adjustment shall be made to the system to produce these quantities of air, and to eliminate any objectional drafts or noise which might exist. Contractor shall perform all air balancing in the presence of the Architect's Field Representative. B. When balancing has been completed, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with all necessary data, readings, and velocities at each outlet to substantiate that the systems are balanced and providing the necessary quantities of air as shown on the drawings. C. If the Architect deems it necessary, the Contractor shall rebalance air units and correct conditions to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. r� End of Section 15650 - 3 P- SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other requirements. applicable clauses and regulations for other 1.03 SUBMITTAL: A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW VELOCITY -.LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK: A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished airtight joints. The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free of vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall have splitters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal. B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems. C. Air turns shall be as manufactured by Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job -built turning vanes will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed inside of insulation. D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts. E. Ductwork for round ducts shall conform to the latest edition ASHRAE guide. F. All duct construction seam corners and connections shall be sealed with white "Permagum Slugs" as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc. G. All ductwork shall be made airtight and reinforced as required for pressures as shown on the drawings. H. All dimensions indicated shall be sheet metal dimensions. Allowance 15840 - 1 shall be made for internal .insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.02 ZONE VOLUME.CONTROL DAMPERS: A. Volume control dampers shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings for all air unit zone ducts with locking operator installed on bottom side of ducts. B. Dampers shall be the opposed blade tyyppe with corner bracing for stiffening as manufactured by Young Regulator Co., Model No. 817, or approved equal, of size shown on the drawings. 2.03 FIBER DUCTWORK: A. Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere. 2.04 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Furnish and install flexible connections of 30 ounce woven glass fabric from discharge and return openings of equipment to ductwork. The flexible connections shall be of a type that is airtight, equal to Ventfabrics "Ventglas", and shall be installed in such a manner that the air flow is not restricted nor the connection leaks air. At least 1" slack shall be allowed in connection to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fans to ductwork. B. Fabric connections shall be UL approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and working system. B. Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electro- plated zinc or hot -dipped galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter. C. Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center. D. When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes. E. Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut. Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure. 3.02 CLEANING: A. _ After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. All damaged insulation shall be replaced. End of Section 15840 - 2 t� FSECTION 15870 - GRILLES REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, .supply and returns, shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTAL: A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 • PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSERS: A. Ceiling supply diffusers, except where shown on the drawings and/or r. specified, shall be all fully adjustable, all as shown on the r drawings. All diffusers shall be equipped with deflectrols and opposed blade volume controls operated from the face of the diffusers and deflectrols. B. Ceiling diffusers shall be of the removable core type, and hinge assemblies for 1, 2, 3 or 4-way deflection where shown on the drawings. r 2.02 CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLES: A. Ceiling return air grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings. All ceiling return air grilles shall be equipped with removable cores. 2.03 FINISHES: A. Side wall supply registers, side wall returns and side wall exhaust grilles shall be electroplated zinc core and prime coat frame. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be baked off-white enamel. Ceiling return air grilles shall be baked off-white enamel. Ceiling exhaust grilles shall be baked off-white enamel. Door grilles shall be electroplated brushed bronze. Ceiling transfer grilles shall be baked off-white enamel. t 2.04 ACCESSORIES: A. All supply registers, diffusers, return air and exhaust air grilles r. shall be equipped with tamperproof hex socket screws, Yum-27 hex head screws, or No. 8 Phillips Type "A" ovalhead screws. B. This Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a supply of twelve (12) volume control damper operators, twelve (12) hex socket screw 15870 - 1 r i wrenches, and twenty-four (24) vertical blade adjustment wrenches at completion of the job. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GUARANTEE: A. This Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a written factory guarantee with submittal data, that all registers and diffusers will perform as follows: 1. Diffusers and registers shall diffuse air uniformly throughout the conditioned space with a 25 deg. F. temperature differential between average room temperature and supply air temperature. The velocities in the 5' occupancy zone, measured no closer than 6". from any wall surface, shall not exceed 30 FPM at 2 deg. F., 50 FPM at 1-1/2 deg. F., or 75 FPM at l degree F. temperature differential, with a minimum average room temperature of 75 deg. F. 2. Maximum decibel rating of any side wall register shall not exceed 30 db at a range of 5' in front of the register and at a maximum register face velocity of 600 FPM. B. If factory guarantee is not received, equipment will not be approved. End of Section 15870 2 SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS ,PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General. Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. B. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete the installation of the complete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings. C. Electrical Division Index: 16010 - General Electrical Provisions 16110 - Raceways 16120 - Conductors 16130 - Boxes and Fittings 16134 - Panelboards 16140 - Wiring Devices 16170 - Switches and Fuses 16450 - Grounding 16500 - Lighting 16770 - Sound/Intercom System r 1.02 WORK INCLUDED: A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related work as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified as follows: 1. Installation of secondary electrical services as shown on the drawings. 2. From starting point connect all panelboards, power outlets, convenience outlets, switches and controls. 3. Conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets for telephone system. 4. Conduits, wiring, and installation of sound systems. r" 5. Conduits, pull wires, junction boxes for Owner furnished ? equipment. .- 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR AGENCIES AND STANDARDS: A. Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), and the terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules, regulations and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to the Owner. B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, �. equipment or devices shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL is required. C. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations shall apply: American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA), National 16010 - 1 rr Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval in accordance with the requirements contained in the SPECIAL PROVISIONS, a minimum of six (6) copies of all shop drawings after the material list has been approved and prior to ordering. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature'or critical to the installation, and pertinent data required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has been reviewed and accepted and all contract deviations identified. In addition to, but not limited to, specific references or requests, submit shop drawings for the following applicable items: Switchboards, Panelboards, Lighting Fixtures, Transformers, Alarm Systems, Primary Cable, Emergency Battery Units, Fire Alarm. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: A. The electrical requirements for equipment -specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer. B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment shall - be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's currentandstandard design. D. Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the project site. E. Materials and Equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements specified below. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhere herein and as shown on the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. 16010 - 2 i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: ►M A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. ,. 3.02 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING: A. Furnish and install all temporary electrical facilities required for construction and safety operations. No part of the permanent electrical systems or the existing electrical system may be used for temporary service unless approved by the Engineer. 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTS: .- A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such _ time as the Engineer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and *- equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. �., C. Prior to acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings make final adjustments of tap changers on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with 'M specifications and equipment installed. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove acceptability. �. E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The Exchange will furnish the necessary electric power. 3.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS: A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, furnish competent instruction to the Engineer in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems. •- B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work. prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) sets of complete operating and maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment installed. Include catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists, and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals specified for individual systems or equipment. 16010 - 3 3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS: A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device to identify each item with its respective service. Marking may be stencilled on the enclosure or adjacent surface in utility areas. Provide nameplates in finished area. B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device pplate. C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets. 3.06 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING: A. Perform excavation, backfilling and repaving required for work under this Division in accordance with DIVISION 2, SITE WORK. In general, backfill and tamp with compaction at least equal to that of the surrounding area. B. No excavation shall begin in areas where utilities exist until the utility companies have been notified and each utility company has located and staked the locations. All excavation in these areas shall be by hand. 3.07 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Provide record drawings showing the "as -built" condition of all electrical work. Information shall include but not be limited to indicating: 1. All floor outlets. 2. Underfloor duct and all connections to duct system. 3. All conduit runs including size installed. 4. All stub -up locations of conduits in floor routed up columns or walls. 5. Locations and sizes of all junction and pull boxes. B. This drawing shall be a mylar sepia of the power plans. 3.08 WORKMANSHIP: A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion. All mechanics shall be capable experienced electricians. B. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall be set plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wiring troughs and barriers shall be as required by the National Electric Code as amended to date. C. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or rooms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side of doors. D. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the Owner before installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final rough -in is made. 16010 - 4 r E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follows: (Dimensions are from bottom of box to floor.) Switches -........-. .. ..... 4'-0" r Convenience Outlets ----------- 1'-4" or as noted Telephone Outlets------------- 1'-4" or as noted Thermostats ------------------- 4'-6" Panelboards------------------- 6'-0" from top of floor Power Outlets ................. 1'-4" or as noted Call in Switches .............. 4'-8" or as noted F. All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls r s do not.extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs. Conduit in shop areas may be run exposed, threaded through roof joist. G. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush r' with finished surface. Outlet boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly. H. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are ,. actually required. J. Outlet boxes shall be provided in all cases with proper supports for fixtures. K. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition. i L. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist of one (1) through circuit, to which �- shall be spliced the branch from this circuit. M. Wire and cable connectors shall be solderless, mechanical type. Connectors for conductors 08 AWG and smaller shall be Buchanan Electrical Products copper squeeze -on type with molded rubber or vinyl cap, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. Scotchlock, or Ideal Industries Super -Nut spring connector with molded vinyl cap. N. Conduits shall be of such size and shall be so installed that the r^ required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive ' stain. Powdered soapstone only may be used as a lubricant where necessary. Sizes of conduits shall be in accordance with National ,,. Code tables. Flexible metal conduit may be used for final connections to motors, etc., but shall not be over 48" in total length from outlet box to motor. Waterproof flexible conduit may be used in exterior locations. Connectors for conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with clamp -on molded covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Co., or Burndy Engineering Company. r- Flexible conduit smaller than 112" diameter shall not be permitted to be used. P. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings. Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction. i Q. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting ceiling outlets together, shall have •• a drag consisting of a number of tight fitting rubber washers drawn through before wires are pulled in. PM End of Section 16010 - 5 .. P_ PM SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements apply. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS; A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion - resistant coating on the inside. D. Flexible Conduit: Commercial greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. No flexible conduit shall be installed over 2' in length. E. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded liquid -tight PVC outer jacket and a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in the convolutions may be omitted. F. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 112 inch except where specifically approved for equipment connections. Sizes shall be as noted on the drawings and where not noted sizes shall be as required by the NEC. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS; A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed. B. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated throats, and shall be of one of the following types: 1. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit. 2. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and clamped by one or more screws. 3. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions. C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only 16110 - 1 with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "0" ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected. D. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or IMC permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and connectors either steel or malleable iron only, "Concrete -tight" or "Rain -tight", and either the gland and ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have insulated throats. EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not permitted. E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without imppairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid aluminum conduit larger than 1/2 inch size. F. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. G. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION; A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum conduit is_not permitted. B. EMT: Not permitted underground nor embedded in concrete. C. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at all resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations and for connections to wet -pipe mechanical systems. A11 flexible conduit in kitchen, food preparation, walk-ins, and dishwashing locations shall be liquid -tight. D. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit may be embedded in concrete providing the outside diameter does not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab, wall, or beam, is located entirely within the center third of the member, and lateral- spacing of conduits is not less than three diameters. E _ Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit, that is not completely encased in concrete but is in contact with ground or on a vapor barrier, shall be wrapped in Scotchap 51 half -lapped, or shall have an additional outside factory coating of polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 20 mils. Other PVC of Phenolic resin -epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically resistant 16110 - 2 may be used providing approval by the Engineer is obtained prior to installation. F. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at -- right angles to the lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows. ,_ G. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed where possible - unless otherwise noted. Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically approved by �- the Engineer. Install concealed conduit systems in as direct lines as possible. H. Exterior Underground Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, ,. wrapped as above, or concrete encased Schedule 40 PVC, shall be used for all circuits outside the building slab. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of 2'-6" below finished grade. J. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run the number of quarter bends T or equivalent between terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four (4) bends for conduits up to 1-1/4 inch, three (3) bends for 1.1/2 to 2.1/2 inch conduits, and two (2) bends for 3- to 4-inch .- conduits. Conduits run between cabinets or boxes; shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs nor 100 feet for runs with maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius. K. Conduit. Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT '" terminating in the bottoms of boxes or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors. L. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits F_ pass from warm to cold locations, and where otherwise indicated. M. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves that pa are used shall be caulked tight with lead yarn. 3.02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS: A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only lighting .. system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall be permitted from metal roof decks. B. Straps: Install one -hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1.1/2 inch. Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps. C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more •- horizontal conduits or EMT run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member by a U-bolt, one -hole strap or other specially designed and approved fastener. D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the support of any conduit, EMT or light fixtures in open ceiling areas. E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion ,. bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs 16110 . 3 r, and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the Engineer. F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by - means of pipe clamps, hangers, etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and supporting members will not be acceptable. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION; A. Contractor shall furnish as -built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and boxes run into floor and from - underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations. 3.04 CLOSING OF OPENINGS: _ A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the - Engineer. End of Section 16110 - 4 PM SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 ART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS): A. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper conductors with 600 volt insulation. Stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall not be permitted. B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Type THHN minimum or Type XHHW filled cross -linked polyethylene 90 deg. C thermosetting insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90 deg. C minimum insulation within fixture wireways of fluorescent fixtures, Type RF-2 or TF commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for Class 2 remote control and signal circuits. C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Not less than NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits of 120 volts, or more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If Contractor furnishes other than specified equipment, it: shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors as required without additional cost to the Owner. D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows: 201 /208V Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor. Conductors No. 12 and 10 shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be color coded at r- each termination and in each box or enclosure with 6 inches of half -lapped 3/4 inch pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound. 16120 - 1 7W 2.02 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE: A. Foil shielded twisted pair cable shall be stranded equal to Belden "Belfoil", sized as required. B. Unless otherwise noted, co -axial cable shall be Belden RG-59, 20 AWG. C. As required or specified in the section of these specifications specifying the eqquipment. Cable shall be continuous from backboards or panels to outlets or other termination points without splices. 2.03 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS: A. Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the cable shall be used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used for cables with metallic sheath. 2.04 CONNECTORS AND LUGS: A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps. B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt -type pressure connectors, properly taped or insulated. 2.05 TAPE: A. Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1.000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance, oil -resistant vinyl backing, oil -resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per ASTM D-568 Test Method B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS): A. Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and service ground. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the Engineer. Submit written reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the Engineer. 3.02 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from termination to termination without splices unless approved by the Engineer. End of Section 16120 2 i" SECTION 16130 - BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES: A. Construction: Zinc -coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy the condition at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts removed ., only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Square cornered, straight sided gang boxes, 4 inch octagon concrete rings - and 4 inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars may be folded type: one-piece deep -drawn type for all other boxes. B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices in accordance with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes •- not to exceed 6 inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device or application intended. C. Fixture Studs: 3/8 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards. ^' D. Exposed: Screw -joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather. E. Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square corners and straight sides for receptacles and switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone or wood walls. - Install without plaster rings. F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less than 4 inches square by 2.1/8 inches deep for signal devices, 4.11/16 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep for two devices and multigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for �. switches and receptacles on unfinished walls may be screw -joint type with covers to fit the devices. G. Wall -Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4.11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameter by 1.1/2 inch deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter openings. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed conduits. J. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment ground conductor, for, serving motors, 16130 - 1 lighting fixtures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall be green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing. 2.02 PULL BOXES: A. Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. Pull boxes with internal volume not more than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull boxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers shall be same thickness as box and shall have corrosion - resistant screws or bolt attachments. 2.03 FLOOR BOXES: A. Heavy-duty, cast, adjustable type suitable for the device or application indicated, unless noted. Provide carpet flanges in carpeted area. Each telephone outlet shall consist of a horizontal cast aluminum housing with a one inch bushed side opening. Outlets shall have provisions to accommodate a ten wire telephone terminal block. Gaskets shall be used to insure proper installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OUTLET BOXES: A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or ceiling line, or, if installed in walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 1/4 inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster covers. A multiple of box extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work. B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile, block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height indicated. Verify with Architect. C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the Architect. 3.02 PULL BOXES: A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings. 3.03 FLOOR BOXES: A. Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor tile. 16130 - 2 PM P 3.04 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS: A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum 1/2 inch flexible metallic conduit, 4 to 6 feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit shall not be used as the ground. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means of painted -on stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations. In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 9 - Finishes. r P_ End of Section 16130 - 3 7 SECTION 16134 - PANELBOARDS PM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive literature, and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class, and interrupting rating of all overcurrent devices. Identify available spaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install at locations as shown on the drawings approved panelboards of a type indicated and specified herein. B. Panels identified on the drawings for use as service equipment shall be so labeled. �- C. Panelboards shall comply with the applicable sections of UL, NEC and NEMA and shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse Electric Corporation. 2.02 INTERIORS: A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled with bolt -on devices. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. B. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be ,. included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. C. Main bus bars shall be plated aluminum or copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C •- maximum. D. A copper ground bus shall be included in all panels. 2.03 BOXES: A. Boxes shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply othher electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. B. Boxes shall be provided with removable blank ends. 16134 1 OM 2.04 TRIMS: A. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door over all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semi - flush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. B. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible. C. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed and a finish coat of gray ANSI 61 paint applied. D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 of an inch on all sides. E. A typewritten circuit directory card with clear plastic cover shall be supplied mounted on the inside of each door. = F. Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section. 2.05 PANELBOARD RATINGS: A. Panelboards rated 240 VAC or less shall have short circuit ratings as shown on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. B. Breakers shall be a'minimum of 100 ampere frame. Breakers 15 through 100 amperes trip size shall take up the same pole spacing. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. 2.06 SPACE ONLY: A. Where "space only" is noted on the drawings, provide necessary connectors, mounting brackets, etc., for the future insertion of an overcurrent device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CIRCUITING: A. Special care shall be taken so that circuits are connected to the panels in such an arrangement as to insure, insofar as possible, that loads on the different phases at the panel are balanced. End of Section 16134 2 i WIRING DEVICES PM SECTION 16140 { PART 1 - GENERAL ` 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General equirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: ►� A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SNAP SWITCHES: A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use type for mounting in a single -gang spacing, fully rated 20 amperes minimum on inductive and resistive r- loads at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the Underwriters' Laboratories. Inc., UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap Switchesand further requirements herein specified. Specification grade,'heavy duty, single -pole, 3-way or 4-way, of the maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or •- melamine with cover of molded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or cover. Ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the r, drawings. Silver or silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication WD1-1965, and shall be as follows unless otherwise noted: 20A 120/277 AC Leviton 1P 1221-I ,. 3-way 1223-I 2.02 RECEPTACLES: A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in accordance with NEMA Publication WD1-1965, Part 3 and Part 10, and the Texas Department of Human Services Minimum Standards for Day Care Centers, Section 4300, Number 1, Part .- A. Fire-resistant, non -absorptive, hot -welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and bases with metal plaster ears (integral with the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on drawings. Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong. B. Grounding Type: All receptacle shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table 250-55 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke. 16140 - 1 0- C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows: 20A - 125V AC 2P 3W Leviton 5362-SC-I D. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be of the spring hinged flap type. 2.03 PLUG CAPS: A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug caps are required for duplex receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations or where exposed to weather. 2.04 DEVICE PLATES: A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special purpose outlet. Provide multi - gang outlet plates.for multi -gang boxes. Plates on finished walls shall be stainless steel. Screws shall be metal with counter -sunk heads, in a color to match the finish of the plate. B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor -tight type. Provide hinged lift covers for devices. C. Communication: Plates for telephone and intercommunication have a 1/2 inch bushed opening in the center. D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEVICE PLATES: A. Install with alignment tolerance of 1/16th inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces. End of Section 16140 - 2 SECTION 16170 - SWITCHES AND FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: r, A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES: A. 30 to 1200 Amperes 250 Volts Ac, Dc; 600 Volts Ac 2, 3 Poles Fusible and Non -Fusible Copper Terminals Enclosures NEMA 1 General Purpose NEMA 3R Raintight r B. Furnish and install where indicated heavy duty type safety switches having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications shown on the drawings. Safety switches shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse. C. All switches shall have: NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise noted; metal nameplates, front cover mounted, that contain a permanent record on switch type, catalog number and Hp ratings (with both standard and time delay fuses): handle whose position is easily recognizable and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; visible blades; reinforced fuse clips; nonteasible, positive, quick make - quick break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. D. Rooftop units and other outdoor equipment shall be provided with Bryant Hi -Tech disconnects unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.02 FUSES: A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss •- Fusetron or equal. B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Feeder protection in conjunction with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125% of load current or as required for coordination. Current limiting high -interrupting capacity fuses coordinated with molded case circuit breakers shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer. C. Coordination: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide basic selective protection and _ properly coordinate with the other associated protective equipment. D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. E 16170-1 OM PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DISCONNECTING MEANS: A. Install in each location indicated.on the drawings. 3.02 SPARE FUSES: A. -Furnish one complete set of each size of current limiting fuse other than Fusetron, each size of current limiting fuse installed for circuit breaker protection, and each size Fusetron fuse in excess of 30 amperes. Also one spare set,of each size high voltage fuses installed. OM SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Raceways - Section 16110 C. Panelboards - Section 16134 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Materials, equipment and devices related to the grounding system are specified under other sections of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Install two separate grounding systems; a service grounding system and an equipment grounding system. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment and neutral conductor shall be grounded in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawingsor specified. Connect the two grounding systems together only at the main service equipment and to the secondary terminals or transformers creating separately derived distribution systems, such as dry -type transformers. 3.02 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM: A. General: The service grounding system is provided for the A.C. service neutral ground. Current return conductors, such as neutrals of the service entrance, feeder circuits, and branch circuits, shall not be used for equipment grounding. Care must be exercised to insure that neutral bars are not bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, motor control centers, or switchboards, which are not part of the main service equipment. Except for separately derived systems, the neutral conductors shall be grounded only in the main service equipment. .. B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service equipment by interconnecting the insulated neutral bus (or bar), the uninsulated equipment ground bus (or bar), and service grounding electrode conductor. C. Neutral Disconnecting Means: Install a neutral disconnecting means in the main service equipment for disconnecting and isolating the neutral bus from the common ground. This disconnecting means may be •- disconnecting links in the interconnection between the insulated neutral and the uninsulated equipment ground. D. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated equipment ground bar, in all switchboards, panelboards, 16450 - 1 r transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., which have neutral connections. 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM: A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground of noncurrent -carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the system. The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to provide greater safety by limiting the electrical potential between noncurrent -carrying parts of the system, and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere in this section of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding system and the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure of the main service equipment in the uninsulated equipment ground bus (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 25% of the largest service overcurrent device. D. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar, in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors. The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboards, or a separately mounted .bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. The ground bar shall be adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly cleaning both surfaces to assure good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three phase spares and spaces. E. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a metallic housing of electrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings provide ground bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install grounding conductor in each non-metallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound or low -voltage signals, and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor. Bond the conductor at both ends in the equipment grounding system. F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit. Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each single phase branch circuit. Install the required grounding conductor in thecommonconduit or raceway with the related phase and/or neutral conductors and connect to the box or cabinet grounding terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor. 16450 2 Pft G. Devices: Install a`minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles and •- through flexible conduit to all light fixture housings. H. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the equipment ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor. Install the grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related circuit conductors. 3.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A. Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One shall be the main cold water metallic water piping system, and the other shall be a made -electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of a concrete foundation footing which is in direct contact with the earth (NEC 250-81c). Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the building at the point of entrance. The grounding electrodes for separately derived systems shall be approved for the application. 3.05 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250.94, including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous without joint or splice, and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and most direct path, and terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type TW. The equipment grounding conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder service serves a series of panelboards or transformers, the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without splices. Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal sheathed holes. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance. 3.06 GROUND CONNECTIONS: A. Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps. If surface is coated, the coating must be removed down to the bare metal. After the coating has been removed, apply a non -corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal, it shall be painted or touched up with "Galvanox". 3.07 TESTS: A. Test the completed grounding system with an ohmmeter at the service ground bar and submit a written report to the Architect for approval. The service shall not be energized if the test shows more than 5 ohms, unless approved by the Engineer. End of Section 16450 - 3 SECTION 16500 — LIGHTING — PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: r A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Grounding - Section 16450 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special ' installation instructions, photometric data, and descriptive literature. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior approval has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the specified and proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the Fixture Schedule are indicative of the r^ general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and r, equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Engineer. All fluorescent fixtures shall p be of the type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout of the type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps, sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers. plaster rings, etc., as required. PM 2.02 BALLASTS: A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETL certified CBM r. label, suitable for 120V operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Provide premium Class P protected ballasts with built-in thermally actuated automatic reclosing device. Manufacturers shall certify in writing that the ballast hot spot shall not exceed 90 deg. F. ambient temperature. Ballasts shall be energy saving type. Provide two (2) bolt attachment of ballasts. B. H.I.D.: One lamp type as required for the application. Suitable for �- use with H.I.D. lamps. Ballast for exterior H.I.D. lamps shall be rated for -20 deg. F. C. Manufacturers: Advance, Valmont or G.E. 2.03 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: A. All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel r- structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas. r- 16500 1 r- B. Fluorescent fixtures indicated to inboard lamps connected to one connected to the other ballast. have dual switching shall have the ballast and the outboard lamps 2.04, FINISH: A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal parts shall be aluminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder coat, post -fabrication baked white enamel finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.05 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS: A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contacts. 2.06 CEILING TRIM: A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed. Verify prior to ordering. 2.07 LENS: A. When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 100% acrylic meeting American Society for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels and other luminous plastic members of fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch thick prismatic Pattern 19 clear acrylic material. Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per minute for a 1/2 inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the naked eye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D-795-44T (500 hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used. The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax. 2.08 HOUSING: A. Not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over corrosion -resistant primer unless otherwise specifically approved. 2.09 EMERGENCY LIGHT BATTERY PACKS: A. Lighting fixtures so indicated on the drawings shall be provided with emergency lighting feature. Components shall consist of a sealed nickel - cadmium battery and a solid state invertor, charger and switch system. The components shall be self-contained within the fixture and be factory installed. The rechargeable battery shall operate one lamp at an emergency level for a minimum of 90 minutes. The fixture shall be U.L. listed. System shall have a 5 year unconditional guarantee. Units on switched circuits shall be wired such that the fixture can be switched off without causing the emergency battery to operate. Units shall be Bodine B-50 or approved equal. 16500 - 2 PM r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPORTS: A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between structural members. No lighting fixtures, conduit or outlet boxes shall be supported from the building sheet metal deck:. Where lay -in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type. Coordinate supports for lay -in fixtures with Ceiling Contractor. 3.02 LOW DENSITY CEILING: A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on combustible low -density cellulose fiberboard (NEC.410-76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that are not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shall be developed which meets the approval of the Engineer. 3.03 CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT: A. The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with the type of ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation. 3.04 BLOCKING: A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure. 3.05 LAMP GUARDS: A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent fixtures to prevent lamps from falling. 3.06 CLEAN-UP: A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely lamped, clean and free from dust, plaster or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other components necessary to complete the fixtures. 3.07 LAMPS: A. In new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven (7) days before building acceptance or beneficial occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Pft End of Section 16500 - 3 0. PM SECTION 16770 - SOUND/INTERCOM SYSTEM -- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS r A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. B. This Contractor shall visit site prior to bidding and verify extent of work required to connect new facility speakers to existing r' Elementary School PA Systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: r A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 B. Raceways - Section 16110 C. Conductors — Section 16120 D. Boxes and Fittings - Section 16130 E. Switches and Fuses - Section 16170 F. Grounding - Section 16450 1.03 SOUND SYSTEM, GENERALLY: A. This section covers the expansion of the existing sound/intercom system to be installed in the new facility. This system shall be installed as indicated on the plans and specified herein. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install as specified hereinafter and as shown on the plans, the sound system including conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, speakers, etc. in operating order. C. The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the sound system. All equipment shall be completely installed properly, interconnected, and placed in proper working order. D. All equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories and be listed by their re-examination service. All work must be done in accordance with applicable electrical -codes, under the direction of a qualified and approved factory distributor, to the approval of r Owner. He shall also train the Owner's personnel in the operation of r the equipment. E. Qualification of Installer and Installation: The system shall be ,.. installed only by an experienced sound system subcontracting firm regularly engaged in the installation of intercom system subcontracting. The Contractor shall install the intercommunications equipment at the locations indicated, install all wiring necessary to interconnect the equipment, and connect all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions furnished therewith. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted. •- F. Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed in F accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. The installation shall be accomplished by workmen r- skilled in this type of work. System connections shall be made by approved plug connections, identified screw terminal strips, and non- corrosive resin core solder on terminal strips or connectors. Wiring shall be neatly cabled, trained, fanned in each cabinet and junction box, with each cable permanently tagged to identify the area of ¢ function served. Runs of conduit, wire and cable shall be straight, neatly arranged, and properly supported, and shall be parallel or perpendicular to walls and partitions. 16770 - 1 G. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, fuses and pilot lights, to be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of 360 days from date of acceptance. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions and descriptive literature. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 _ EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR: A. Conduit, conductor, outlets, etc., as specified in other sections. B. Sound system cables shall be 20 gauge insulated copper. C. Ceiling mounted loud speakers shall be Soundolier HD25 or approved equal. Ensure compatibilty with existing amplifier. D. Call -in switches shall be Rauland 2304FA or an approved equal. PART 3 • EXECUTION 3.01 TESTS: A. After complete installation of the equipment, and at the time directed, the Contractor shall conduct tests to demonstrate that operating and installation requirements of this specification have been met. 3.02 GUARANTEE: A. The Contractor shall inspect the equipment furnished by the supplier and shall notify the Architect after receipt of equipment of damaged, defective or insufficient parts. Failure to report such discrepancies will signify Contractor's acceptance of equipment as complete and functionally operative. . End of Section 16770 - 2 I i SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to work specified in this section. 1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Bidders are expected tovisitthe site of the building and compare the Drawings and Specifications with existing conditions, and inform themselves of all conditions which will affect this work. Failure of the successful Bidder to do so will in no way relieve the Bidder from necessity of furnishing any materials, labor, or equipment, or performing any work that may be required to complete work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, without additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 NOTIFICATIONS: A. Contractor shall give the Architect verbal notification at least 48 hours prior to commencing any of the following: Excavation Application of soils poisoning Asphaltic concrete paving Concrete placement Metal building erection Installing insulation in concealed spaces Installation of ceiling board in grid ceilings Painting Testing Water, Gas, Sewer & Refrigerant Lines Setting Heating/Air Conditioning Units 1.04 PROTECTION AND ACCESS: A. Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property at all times, and shall make good at his own expense any damage to such property arising out of any operation connected with his contract. B. Contractor shall at all times protect the excavations, trenches, and/or the building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water. He shall provide pumps and equipment and enclosures to provide this protection. C. Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather - rain, wind, storms, frost, or heat so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus and fixtures from injury or damage. At the end of the day's work all new or old work likely to be damaged shall be covered. 1.05 SITE WORK: A. Contractor shall not commence work on concrete sidewalks, entrance slabs, wearing surface at drives, service roads and parking areas until work requiring heavy trucks or equipment is completed. 1 1.06 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK: A. Before the award of "the Contract, Contractor shall furnish to Architect in writing for acceptance by the Owner and Architect a list of the names of Subcontractors proposed for various portions of the work, including the federal identification number of Contractor and each Subcontractor. Certificates of Workman's Compensation insurance coverage from all subcontractors must be provided for attachment to the Owner -Contractor Agreement. Pay estimates will not be considered until Subcontractors are approved by Architect. 1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES: A. ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES: 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in scheduling his work. Due to the nature of the work required by this contract, all operations must be coordinated with the Owner to insure a minimum of interference with the continuing use of the existing facilities. 2. This contract shall include alterations and additions to existing building as indicated. on the .Drawings. Each Bidder will be expected to familiarize himself with conditions affecting the execution of this work. 3. Drawings and notes do not, indicate complete existing building, or water, sewer, waste, electrical or other construction conditions and each Bidder shall visit the site prior to submitting his proposal and shall inspect installation and conditions to be met and work to be accomplished in removing and modifying existing work and installing any new work in the existing building. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of existing installations and/or installing any new work to meet the requirements of this contract. 4. Certain information is shown on the Drawings concerning the existing installation for general information purposes, but shall not be interpreted as representing "as built" conditions. Where the existing conditions are found to be different from that indicated, Contractor shall provide any materials necessary and make all connections required for proper operation at no additional expense to the Owner. 5. The Owner shall retain possession of all movable equipment and other equipment not attached to the building. In addition the Owner may elect to retain possession of other materials not re- used in the Construction. Materials not retained.by the Owner or to be re -used in the building shall be removed from the site. 6. Re -use of Materials: Materials may be thoroughly cleaned, and if in compliance with the applicable sections of Specifications and prior approval of Architect is obtained, may be stacked on site for re-use.in the building. 7. Where alterations to existing building is required, Contractor shall, after his work is otherwise complete, repair, adjacent finishes and do patching work as necessary to leave the adjacent work in good shape. He shall paint, plaster, trim out, and finish new work and as much adjacent existing work as is necessary to leave the job clean, neat and attractive. 2 r 8. All existing piping and/or circuits which are disconnected during the course of this work shall be reconnected and left in satisfactory operating order unless they are specifically noted to be removed or disconnected. B. WORKING AND STORING AREAS: 1. Areas indicated on the Site Plan by construction fence comprise the working and storing areas. Storing or working outside of the indicated space is prohibited. Keep areas outside the indicated working and storing spaces free from debris incident to this contract. 2. Storing or working outside of indicated remodeled spaces is prohibited. Keep areas outside the remodeled spaces free from debris incident to this project. C. PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES: 1. Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features within designated construction limits and along the access to construction site. Any damage caused by Contractor or his Subcontractor shall be repaired immediately at his expense. D. REPAIR OF DAMAGE: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage caused by him, his workmen, or his 'subcontractors' to the work or materials, to tools and equipment of one another, to adjacent property and persons, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury without cost to the Owner. E. EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES: 1. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the work is to be done. Such lines will be staked by the Owner if necessary for the benefit of the Owner and Contractor prior to start of the work. F. NEW UTILITY CONNECTIONS: r 1. Utility Service: Coordinate with Owner for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required. 2. Outages:Two days prior notice of all utility outages must be given to the Owner, and all work'of this nature must be approved and coordinated with the Owner. G. LAWN SPRINKLER SYSTEM: 1. The existing underground lawn sprinkler system is to be abandoned. The Contractor may remove and discard any portion(s) of the system necessary to perform the construction work. The Contractor shall cap all abandoned piping left in place. H. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE: j• 2. The actual phases of the construction program shall be developed by the successful Bidder in cooperation with the Owner and Architect to provide the needed occupancy of the facilities. 3 J. CONSTRUCTION DUST/SOUND BARRIERS: 1. Contractor shall construct and maintain polyfilm dust/sound barriers to prevent the spread of construction dust and sounds into the adjacent occupied spaces of the existing building. 2. Construct barriers of 2 x 4 wood studs, with 4 mil polyfilm on each side. Fill cavities of studs with 4" unfaced fiberglass insulation. 3. Locate barriers as required and as directed by Owner. 4. SMOKING: Smoking within the existing building is strictly prohibited. Notify employees and subcontractors of this requirement atthebeginning of work. 1.08 COORDINATION: A. All contractors, and subcontractors.on the project shall coordinate their work with each other, advising on work schedules, equipment locations, etc. 1.09 FIELD ENGINEERING: A. LAYING OUT WORK: 1. Immediately upon entering project site for purpose of beginning work, Contractor shall locate all general reference points and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; lay out his own work, and be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of buildings, grading utilities, and other work executed by him under the Contract. He must exercise proper precaution to verify figures shown on Drawings before laying out work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from his failure to exercise such precaution. 2. A competent foreman or superintendent initially approved by Architect, shall be kept by Contractor at the building at all times and in continuous superintendence during the progress of the work, to receive instructions and to act for Contractor in the accurate laying out and direction of all work. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. PERMITS AND LAWS: 1. Contractor shall arrange for the issuance of permits. Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Municipal Laws, Codes and Ordinances applicable to the work of this contract, and he shall also comply with all regulations of National Board of Fire Underwriters having jurisdiction, and he shall obtain and pay for all permits required in connection with the execution of. his work. Architect shall be furnished with certified copies of these permits if requested. 2. If above Laws,. Codes or Ordinances conflict with Contract Documents, then laws, codes or ordinances shall govern instead of Contract Documents, except in such cases where Contract Documents exceed them in quality of materials, or labor; then Contract Documents shall be followed. 1.11 PROJECT MEETINGS: A. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: 1. Prior to Contractor occupying site where the work is to be done the Owner will hold a Preconstruction Conference at a time and place to be established by the Owner. 4 1.12 MATERIAL TESTING: Testing of building materials, as authorized by the Architect, and/or specified elsewhere in these specifications, will be paid by the Owner. If such special inspection or testing reveals a ( failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by I such failure. Testing for plumbing, air conditioning, etc., will not be Ip' paid by the Owner, but by the Contractor concerned, and as specified in Division 15 of this specification. When testing is specified to be paid by the Owner without costs to the Contractor, the Owner will select the testing laboratory. The Contractor shall deliver all bids for such testing directly to the Owner. 1.13 SUBMITTALS: A. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: 1. Within fourteen (14) days after award of a contract, Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Progress Chart or CPM Chart showing sequence of construction, together with proposed completion dates for various trades. 2. Schedule shall indicate start and finish dates for various major subcontracts or operations. 1.14 TEMPORARY UTILITIES: �- A. Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary for utilities t, required during construction. Fees, where required by the utility company, will be paid by Contractor. B. When necessary to connect to existing utility systems furnishing *, power, water, or gas to existing buildings, meters shall be installed on services required for construction, and arrangements shall be made by Contractor to have statements of cost for such service directed to his office for payment. Contractor shall include in his proposal all costs necessary for connecting and extending all necessary utilities. Where connections are made to existing utility �,. services, shut-off or turn -on shall be by Building Maintenance only. C. Mechanical, Electrical and Utility Contractors shall make arrangements with General Contractor to use these services for testing and other normal use during construction. D. Contractor shall provide adequate temporary lighting in the building for all trades. E. Owner's Computer Equipment: Contractor shall take every precaution �.. to avoid any power interruptions that could be detrimental to the Owner's computer equipment operations. F. Telephone: Contractor shall be responsible for his own telephone. Contractor shall provide and pay for a telephone at the building site in order to expedite his work. Local telephone service shall be made available to all persons connected with the work. G. Toilets: Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order temporary chemical toilet facilities for all workmen and shall remove same at completion of the work. Toilets shall be completely enclosed and of neat appearance. Toilet locations shall be approved by Architect. 5 H. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. J. Cover trenches and holes when not in use. Erect barriers at changes in plane steeper than 45 degrees and more than 3 feet in height. K. Provide facilities to exclude unauthorized visitors from the construction site. Provide personal safety equipment for authorized visitors. Provide temporary doors with locks where required. L. Provide .and maintain warning lights and signs as necessary to prevent damage or injury. Keep warning lights burning from dusk to dawn. 1.15 BARRIERS: A. CONSTRUCTION FENCES: 1. Contractor shall construct and maintain protective temporary fences around construction project or projects adjacent to existing building. Due to nature of the work required by this contract, all fencing must be coordinated with the Owner so as to interfere with the program as little as possible. 2. Temporary fences shall be constructed from 6 x 6 -10/10 welded wire reinforcing mesh. Fences shall be 6'0" high, and posts shall be 4 x 4 timber spaced as necessary to maintain fences in good repair. Chainlink fencing is acceptable. 3. Upon completion of project, storage and access areas shall be restored to pre -construction condition. Grassed area shall be fine graded to remove any evidence of construction vehicular traffic. 1.16 TEMPORARY CONTROLS: A. WEED CONTROL: Contractor shall keep the streets and construction area free of weeds. Weeds shall be kept to a height of no more than 12 inches to comply with City Ordinances, Institution Regulations and with environmental safety regulations. B. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: 1. Contractor shall remove all combustible and non-combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and legally dispose of same. 2. Burning of any materials will not be permitted within the boundaries of the Owner's property. 1.17 TRAFFIC REGULATION: A. PARKING: Parking of private cars permitted only in the Contractor's stack lot and in areas designated by the Owner (if any). Notify employees and subcontractors of this requirement at beginning of work. 1.18 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS: A. SIGNS: 1. No signs or advertisements will be permitted without approval of Architect. 0 1.19 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT: A. STORAGE AND PROTECTION: 1. Contractor shall use the stack lot for all material storage. 2. He shall so store, pile and arrange his materials that they will not be injured by the elements, by progress of erection, by contact with the ground or from any other cause. He shall provide and do all covering necessary for this purpose and shall remove from premises any damaged materials when so directed by Architect. 1.20 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: See Section 01700. 7 PM e i NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE TO: The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the day of 199_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: i w as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 199_ at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of m7surance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of r., Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (S%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Owner's Representative